HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4806 - Contract-Wardroup & Associates Inc-Municipal Square Hallway_Restroom Renovations - 04_13_1995Resolution No. 4806
April 13, 1995
Item #34
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to
execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and
between the City of Lubbock and Wardroup & Associates, Inc., of Lubbock, to furnish and
install all materials as bid for the Municipal Square Hallway/Restroom Renovations for the City
of Lubbock, which contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the
Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this
Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this 13th day of
ATTEST: .
Betty M. Johnso , City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
iJ ktq
Victor Kilman,'kxchasing Manager
AS TO FORM:
Donald G. Vandiver, First
Assistant City Attorney
DG V:dplcedoesl WardroupXes
April 4, 1995
April 1995.
a8o�
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
'AL SQUARE RESTROOMMALLWAY RENOVATIONS
BID #13205
r
x
0
co
O
CITY OF LUBBOCK . CN
Lubbock, Texas
F
r
Office of
Purchasing
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
606-767-2167
MAILED TO VENDOR March 16,1995
CLOSE DATE: March 21,1995 @ 2:00 P.M.
tl Bid #13205-MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOMIHALLWAY RENOVATIONS
ADDENDUM # 1
�I Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows:
1. Section 16110, 2.2, D. Use set screw type fittings.
2. Section 16140, 2.2, C. Use Leviton 5362-I receptacles.
3. Section 16500, 2.1. Add type "C" fixture; a recessed can fixture similar to Halo, W643-
4680B-A, one 150 ER40 lamp. Add exit light fixture, similar to existing fixtures in the
building, Sure Liter, ELX-5.
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID.
F
YOU,
Ron Shuif'ield
Senior Buyer
F
CITY OF LUBBOCK
REQUEST FOR BIDS
FOR
TITLE: MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY RENOVATIONS
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 13205
PROJECT NUMBER: 9047.9211
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
r
INDEX
1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
4. PAYMENT BOND
5. PERFORMANCE BOND
6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
7. CONTRACT
8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
10. SPECIFICATIONS
11. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
tom- i=_
17
17
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID # 13205
Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the
Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 210 day
of March,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform
all work for the construction of the following described project:
MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY RENOVATIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer at his office and
publicly read aloud.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing Manager for the City of
,` I Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 13th day of April,1995, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street,
t+ Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any
formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article
5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superiot as the rating of the
bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not
exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check
issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to
the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder
will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions
7 under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and
considered in the preparation of the bid submitted
The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager
ffor the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the
contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to
in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the
requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as
17 heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
i.
5
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement,
minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will
not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a pre -bid conference on 16th day of March, 1995, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference
Room L04, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid
openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible
format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.)
or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
ZCF LUBB
t
RON SHUFFIEL
SENIOR BUYER
e
R
n
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
BID # 13205
Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, Purchasing Department, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at
the Purchasing Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock a.m. on the
21st day of March,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and
perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY RENOVATIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Buyer and
publicly read aloud.
The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for
the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the
contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further
directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage
scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement,
minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will
not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a prebid conference on the 16th day of March,1995, at 10:00 a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room
L04, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid
openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible
format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.)
or 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
C OF L BOCK
i
RON SHUFFIE
SENIOR BUYER
T
L=-- t�:� t= t---" L=— t—_, U-= E= LL� L—La t-- t---- IL—� L::� L---. U--�—
i
7 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
P" 1. SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this
project in accordance with contract documents for the MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY
RENOVATIONS.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions.
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction
of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents.
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
P' It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the
contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of
forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders.
� 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 45 (Forty -Five) consecutive calendar
days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City
reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract
documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the
progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take
such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified.
5. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract
documents.
6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an
RIO affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by
jJ the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been
notified.
7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be
furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor
of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the
project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full
responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract
documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project.
kl
8. GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials
and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which
shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature
whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work
as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during
construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for
proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies,
machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the
work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its
certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract
has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed
contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04
of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be
incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to
exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground
structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these
contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines
and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities
aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work
contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas,
at Contractor's expense.
13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take
such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The
Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and
when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost
,7
and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date
of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project.
14. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City.
In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are
authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall
further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of
j! construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be
the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility comparry having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the
site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable
the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however,
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in
progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number
where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
16. INSURANCE
r
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General
Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory
to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will
be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the
insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all
subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the
Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of
general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the
requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above
mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem
wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be
applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays
unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its
citizens.
7
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the
penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract
within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the
Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and
obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow
construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract
which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day
of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
is. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this
contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than
once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the
seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible
copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each
day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates
or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The
Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate
of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each
laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is
paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in these contract documents.
19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder
without being considered.
20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in
and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or
furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of
discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If
the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is
submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal
signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a
company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an
official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly
certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink.
Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the
outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Proposal for (description of the project).
Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal
may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Proposal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
G) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Spccifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by
reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
No Text
�{ BID PROPOSAL
1
LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT
PLACE: LUBBOCK, TEXAS'.:`3
A
DATE: MARCH, 21 , 1995 r
PRO]ECT NUMBER: #13205 - MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY RENOVATIONS.
_ Proposal of WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. (hereinafter called Bidder)
�To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
771`he Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY
(i
' RENOVATIONS - LUBBOCK, TEXAS
R
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contrail
documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the
7proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to
construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the
price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents.
MATERIALS:: A UeA t (S (- b t C0C>U x40 O )
SERVICES: /,�!//? ,�— L %T G /�' c G (S Z4 GG (�, of ) -
!I
TOTAL BID /� D;�zc�S/1►�fi /i�. G�;ice(�(� %. G G d',
7(Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to
7,Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 45 (Forty -Five) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in
the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of
S100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for
g completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction
number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
17
s Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the
.7scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
H
11
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans,
specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or
before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid-, as provided in
the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (S% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as
a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of
the contract to him.
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5% OF BID Dollars
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the
Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within
ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be
returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents
made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
Secretary (ASSISTANT)
WARDROUP & AS ,
Contractor
BY:
WALLACE C. WARDROUP
VICE PRESIDENT
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
P.O. Box 85563, San Diego, CA 92186-5563
F BID OR PROPOSAL BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, W.C. WARDROUP DBA WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES (hereinafter called the Principal), and
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the
laws of the State of California, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety
upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of TEXAS
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called
the obligee) in the just and full sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT B6$Ilars ($----------- 5%-----i
lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby
bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal as aforesaid,
is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated MARCH 21, 1995 for
MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY RENOVATIONS - LUBBOCK, TEXAS
in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting
[ proposals therefor.
!� NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be
jl awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for
the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null, and void, otherwise to be and remain
in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unless Obligee prior to execution
of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly
r committed to cover the entire cost of the project.
Signed, sealed and dated:
MARCH 21, 1995 ci.pal Ike—
W.C.
W UP DBA Yn?ARDROUP & ASSOCIATES
by eal)
ety
INSU CE COMPANY THE WESfir `
by WKWARD COWAN crney-in-Fact
1CWTX 409 (06/92)
F-
F;
I
F
Insurance Company of the West
HOME OFFICE: SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a Corporation duly authorized and existing
under the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA and having its principal office in the City of San Diego, California, does hereby nominate,
constitute and appoint
HOWARD COWAN
Its true and lawful Attomey(s)•in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred In its name, place and stead, to execute, seal,
acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizanoes or other written obligations in the nature thereof.
This Power of Attorney Is granted and Is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution
adopted by the Board of Directors of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST at a meeting duly calied and held on the 16th day
of AUGUST, 1991. which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following is a true, full, and complete
COPY
"RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the
Company, be, and that each or any of them is, authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named In the
given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company, bonds, undertakings, and alt contracts of suretyship; and that a
Vice President, an Assistant Vice President, a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary be, and that each or any of them hereby is,
authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney, and to attach thereto the seal of the Company.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power
of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile
signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with respect to any
bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it Is attached.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power to execute for and in the name of and on behalf of
the Company any and all bonds and undertakings as the business of the Company may require, and any such bonds or undertakings
executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an authorized officer of the Company.'
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST has caused its official seal to be hereunto affixed and these
presents to be signed by its duly authorized officers this 12th day of January, 1994
. '00PA"go . INSUPANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
3 �
*4ft"1, 110 y
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO SS' C14F01o9- #Joh'nL.m, Senior Vice President
On this 12th day of January, 1994 before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of California, in and for
the County of San Diego, duly commissioned and qualified, came John L Hannum, Senior Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY
OF THE WEST, to me personally known to be the individual and officer described in and who executed the preceding Instrument,
and he acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, deposeth and saith, that he is the said officer of
the Corporation aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seat of the said Corporation, and
that the said Corporate Seal and his signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said Instrument by the
authority and direction of the said Corporation.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal, at the City of San Diego, the day and year
first above written.
NORMA PORTF17 (�
4 COMM, "526" a
Notcry Puhlic-Cc , •rnlo
AN DIEGO COUNTY
'
STATE OF CALIFORNIA My C061M. expiros JAN 14,1996 �r �' " tl
COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO SS' 1 Notary Public
I, the undersigned, E. Harried Davis, Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, do hereby certify that the
original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy. Is in full force and effect, and has not
been revoked.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subasrh4c'f-iriy•r►ame as Vice
Corporation, this 21ST day of MARCH.= _� _ 95
•'. �`�oaµrn`Nrar ..
a �,�o"rorrArfo ��
w+tr1,1`
�IIFO!MtA"' .
President, and affixed the Corporate Seal of the
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
E. Harned Davis
Vice President
ICW CAL 37
7.
8.
PAYMENT BOND
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING —,eL
LICENSE IN TEXAS f
111,7
DAT Y _ _
F I I �.d A) . 137 a 53
" STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160
OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS
,. AS AMENDED BY
ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION,
1959
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that T&klbfilc r P , cam *elnaier called the Principal(s), as
Principal(s), and (�
(hereinafter called the Sur ty(s), Sure (s)p held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in
the amount of ollars (S 7q, L 6 L--) lawful money of the United States for the
payment whereof, the said Princi andSurety bin themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the Lo—day of
19g15 , two,,
and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the
amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at
length herein.
1•"'
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all
claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then,
�-+ this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
t'
PROVIDED, HOWEV
ER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes
of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in
�I accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 3 day of
19 W. e- - !�
%urety Principal U
-
(Title) (Title)
�iOWARD COWAN _
w�
....,�zx.���! . FACT sS ....�o�r, T><ar P
cia
$y: WARDROUP & AHOCIAT15, IVC._
(Title) `
By:
(Title)
ti
The undersi surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas., and hereby designates
HO ARD COZ1t agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service
of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
Approved as to form:
City of Lubbock
By: '
ity Attorney
. n laA"Azbwe"�
Suret
y
* By.
"tie> 'HOWARD COWAN
ATTY IN FACT-_-
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this
person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files.
F
7
PERFORMANCE BOND
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING
LICENS I TEXAS
DAT BY .�
?D6�71o. / 3 7 a� s3
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160
OF THE REVISED CIVIL, STATUTES OF TEXAS AS
AMENDED BY
�! ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1959
f W(=.lG
r7 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Prin pal(), as Principal(s), and
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), Surety(s *e 1 d y bound to the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in
the amount o '` `'ii ' Mars (� 7 lawful money of the United States for the
payment whereof, 07c sai Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
�IWHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the/aNay of
0 .1975. to
and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the
amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at
length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully
perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise
to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes
of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, regular session 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 4y of
19�.
Wout
oe
Surety Principal '
* By By: _
(TitKeY UAWRD COWAN
('Title)
ATTY IN FACT V"64
By
(Title)
By:
(Title)
7
T
The undersi ed surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates
HOWARD Covent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of
process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
Approved as to Form
City of Lubbock
By.
t-City Attorney
Surety
*By:
(Title) HOWARD- CQWAN__
ATTY IN FACT
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this
person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files.
r
F
t ,
IMPORTANT NOTICE
To obtain information or make a complaint:
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information
on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at:
1-800-252-3439
You may write the Texas Department of Insurance:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
FAX # (512)475-1771
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES:
Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you
should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not
resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance.
ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY:
This notice is for information only and does not become a part or
condition of the attached document.
7
Insurance Company of the Nest
P y
HOME OFFICE: SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a Corporation duly authorized and existing
under the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA and having Its principal office In the City of San Diego, California, does hereby nominate,
constitute and appoint:
HOWARD COWAN
e
Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, seal,
acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances or other written obligations In the nature thereof.
7
r
F
This Power of Attorney is granted and Is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution
adopted by the Board of Directors of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day
of AUGUST, 1991, which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following Is a true, full, and complete
copy:
"RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the
Company, be, and that each or any of them is, authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the
given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company, bonds, undertakings, and all contracts of suretyship; and that a
Vice President, an Assistant Vice President, a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary be, and that each or any of them hereby is,
authorized to attest the execution of any such Power of Attorney, and to attach thereto the seal of the Company.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seat of the Company may be affixed to any such Power
of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile
signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with respect to any
bond, undertaking or contract of suretyship to which it Is attached.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Attorney -in -Fact may be given full power to execute for and In the name of and on behalf of
the Company any and all bonds and undertakings as the business of the Company may require, and any such bonds or undertakings
executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an authorized officer of the Company.'
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST has caused its official seal to be hereunto affixed and these
presents to be signed by its duly authorized officers this 12th day of January, 1994
�ooMrew�oR INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
p!T �SORPOR.I7�� !
a1 w
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO SS: John L Hannum, Senior Vice President
On this 12th day of January, 1994 before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of California, in and for
the County of San Diego, duly commissioned and qualified, came John L Hannum, Senior Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY
OF THE WEST, to me personally known to be the individual and officer described in and who executed the preceding instrument,
and he acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, deposeth and saith, that he is the said officer of
the Corporation aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding Instrument Is the Corporate Seal of the said Corporation, and
that the said Corporate Seal and his signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the
authority and direction of the said Corporation.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal, at the City of San Diego, the day and year
first above written. _
I = NORMA PORft R
f COMM, 09526M z )
=j Notary Puhiic-Cal:fi.,rn!o n�—
n •k�'T "AN DIEGO COUNTY
STATE OF CALIFORNIA Mycoc;m, expires.1 14.1996
COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO SS' t Notary Public
I, the undersigned, E. Harned Davis, Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, do hereby certify that the
original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect, and has not
been revoked.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto subscribed. my .name as Vice President, and affixed the Corporate Seal of the
Corporation, this 3RD day of MAY 1g 95
F. ICW CAL 37
+4`soµreNr INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
's
looeraR�rEc +
°itFp1°"" E. Harned Davis
Vice President
No Text
`." y ISSUE DATE (MM/DDIYY)
S/R/OC
PRODUCER
THE INWEST GROUP, INC.
110 N. MARIENFELD ST., SUITE 330
MIDLAND, TEXAS 79701
INSURED
W. C. WARDROUP DBA
WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES
P. 0. BOX 6999
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79493
CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE
DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
COMPANY
LETTER A OKLAHOMA SURETY
COMPAN
LETTER Y B
OKLAHOMA SURETY
f COVERAGES
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE
AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
' TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER
LTR
POLICY EFFECTIVE 'POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DD/YY)
LIMITS
FGENERAL LIABILITY
A
GENERAL AGGREGATE $
2000000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CGL206639
10/1/94 10/1/95
PRODUCTS-COMP/0PACG. a
2000000
CLAIMS MADE: X OCCUR.
PERSONAL 6 ADV. INJURY S
1000000
OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT.
EACH OCCURRENCE S
1000000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S
SOOOO
_
e
MED. EXPENSE (AnY one pew) $
5000
B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
COMBINED SINGLE S
X ANY AUTO 06—TX-5445-1
10/1/94 10/1/95
UNIT
1000000
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
SCHEDULED AUTOS
(Per person)
X HIRED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
S
X NON -OWNED AUTOS
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY
PROPERTY DAMAGE S
C , EXCESS LIABILITY XS 10206 8
5 / 8 / 95 5 / 8 / 96
EACH OCCURRENCE S
X UMBRELLA FORM
AGGREGATE $
lOOOOOO
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
X STATUTORY LIMITS
D WORKER'S COMPENSATION
TSF10418502
10/1/94 10/1/95
EACH ACCIDENT S
5.00000,_„
AND
OISE.ASE—POLICY LIMIT S
_.._
500000_
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE $
E OTHER 1, 250 , OOO LIMIT
BUILDERS RISK 8S22317 10/1/94 10/1/95 $1,000 DEDUCTIBLE
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS
RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK — BID #13205 — MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOM/HALL RENOVATIONS.
ADDITIONAL INSURED IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXCEPT WORKER'S COMPENSATION
j1.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P. 0. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
.ACORD 25-S (7190)
CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO
79457 MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE
LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAI SUCH NOTICE 1111.1- IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UP94filE VPANY,ITP,AGE T OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE! _ _ .
ERTT-1
PRODUCER
THE INWEST GROUP, INC.
110 N MARIENFELD ST SUITE 330
SUM& t ISSUE DATE (MM/DDrm
P*.. t ` " a
5 4 9 5
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND
CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE
DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE
POLICIES BELOW.
MIDLAND, TEXAS 79701
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
COMPANY A
LETTER OKLAHOMA SURETY
7,la
INSURED
COMPANY
LETTER
_ .... .......
W. C. WARDROUP DBA
_ ..
COMPANY C
WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES
LETTER
_-...... _..__ .__ _ ...__.. _ _.
I
P. 0. BOX 6999
COMPANY
L
LETTER
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79493
_.....................
COMPANY E
LETTER
a
'COVERAGES M4
_,.
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY
REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY. BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
r
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
[
Co TYPE OF INSURANCE
LTR
POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DDNY)
A GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERAL AGGREGATE S 500000
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CGL208992 5/4/95 5/4/96 PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG. $
CLAIMS MADE' X OCCUR.
PERSONAL 5 ADV. INJURY $
X OWNER'S 6 CONTRACTOR'S PROT.
EACH OCCURRENCE S 500000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one lire)
S
MED. EXPENSE (Any one person)
$
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
' COMBINED SINGLE
$
ANY AUTO
LIMIT
_ .
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
S
SCHEDULED AUTOS
(Per person)
HIRED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
S
NON -OWNED AUTOS
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY
,
PROPERTY DAMAGE
$
EXCESS LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
$
UMBRELLA FORM
AGGREGATE
S
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
_. ........... _..
WORKER'S COMPENSATION
STATUTORY LIMITS
EACH ACCIDENT
S
AND
DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT
$
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE
5
.OTHER
NAMED INSURED: CITY'OF LUBBOCK
P. 0. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79453
,DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS
RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK — BID #13205 — MUNICIPAL
i
SQUARE RESTROOM/HALLWAY RENOVATIONS.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P. 0. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 7945.7
,ANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO
MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE
LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY. ITS AGE TS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
ft�AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE a •Alk w � �'
fi !1,
ORD 2S4('iioo) ®ACORD CORPO RE
0
0
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
DATE:
Type of
Project:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by
this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the
provisions of the standard policies used by this Company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted
hereon.
TYPE OF INSURANCE
Policy No. Effective Expires Limits of Liability
Workmen's
Compensation
Owner's Protec-
Per Person
S
tive or Contin-
Per Occurrence
$
gent Liability
Property Damage
$
Contractor's
Per Person
$
Protective or
Per Occurrence
$
Contingent
Property Damage
$
Liability
Per Person
$
Automobile
Per Occurrence
$
Property Damage
$
Comprehensive
General Liability
Umbrella Liability
$
The foregoing Policies (do) (do not) cover all sub -contractors.
Locations Covered
DESCRIPTION of Operations Covered
The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the
insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or in case
there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation.
FIVE COPIES OF THIS CERTIFICATE
MUST BE SENT TO THE OWNER. (Name of Insurer)
By:_
Title
7,
iT
7
F
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project,for the duration of the project based on proper
reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to
beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity
will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the
project; and
03) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate: of coverage showing extension of
coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of
the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor
knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person
providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be
covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice
does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be
printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common
to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the
sample notice, without any additional words or changes:
�i
R
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services- related to this construction project must (see reverse) be
covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or
providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an
employee."
[ "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512/440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for
q coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage." and
n- (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any
coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the
project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter,
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the
person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any
person providing services on the project; and
(11) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) -
(H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.0
T
O
U
� � �---� �. �- � �--_ �..T �......� �--` �'-_- '�� � �-� �...-,v � fit �. _-;
7�k
TCONTRACT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 13th day of Aaril,1995, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of
17 Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as
OWNER, and WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of TEXAS,
hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR
7 WPTNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed
by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed m the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby
agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows:
7 BID #13205 - MUNICIPAL SQUARE RESTROOMMALLWAY RENOVATIONS - S74,668.00
7 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost
and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories
and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General
Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given
to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
f The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the
proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on
account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the
7 year and day first above written.
,r
i.
r
Owner's F&pre!4:�ntative
t�.
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
CONTRACTOR:
By:
(Printed or Typed Name)
T=:
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Wardroup & Associates, Inc.
4408 Brownfield Drive
Lubbock, Texas 79410-1799
L=:; t::-- L=-- t_-- r,- u_-_ C_- C-- L--� L- t�- U-- L--, L---- LLLi
T
T
11
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
1. OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be
understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Z. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood
to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: who has agreed to perform
the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
I Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to
GEORGE LISENBE, MECHANICAL ENGINEER, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract
documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other
representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement.
1 I Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not
directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if
any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in
accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of
like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of
the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like
import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any
Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents,
but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor.
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm
or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address
known to him who gives the notice.
r
r
S. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools,
'superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the
execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be
new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory
evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known,
technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been
made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor
miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this
work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout
of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he
shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and
to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for
the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His
efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the
requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the
work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents.
Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this
requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation
therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or
removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's
Representative at Contractor's expense.
I
F14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative
shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to
insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further
agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction
thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of
said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the
parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under
this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the
opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with
said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action
may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter providixi. It is the intent of this
Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's
Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to
arbitration as hereinafter provided.
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the: Owner and the Contractor a
written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work
or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision
within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party
appealing.
7 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time
such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the
materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is
done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance
required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work The
Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of arty subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so
appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying
plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer,
supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his
decision.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the
work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's
Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be
binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor
is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations
of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all
risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
T
r
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of
the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions,
and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of
the terms or obligations herein contained.
is. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required
under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that
any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be
discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written
consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also
understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials,
tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's
Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be
maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be
constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's
Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location
wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be
contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be
ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in
accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such
errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any
work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's
Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractors expense. In the event that any part of the work is being
fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owners Representative to make
observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owners Representative may require
Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such
tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other
applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
.7
FIf any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the
Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by
the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests,
inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the
requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the
Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's
Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve
the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is fisher agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or
selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with
plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's
Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full
accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at
Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line,
grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any pxu-t thereof, either before or after
the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for
damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work, and the
increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity
actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be
paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any
work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for
any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in
preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the
Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work
as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as
provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when
presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor
to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to
the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then
the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (151/6) per cent.
F
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply
and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics
and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used
on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on
account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property
Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the
Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of
the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The
Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type
and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless
otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General
Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall
cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements
of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or
Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same
shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any
orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an
adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order
authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to
the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the
work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost
thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to
arbitration as herein below provided.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and
other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all
appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by
Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract
documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no
such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the
Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work
in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that arty request for clarification must be
submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work
with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in
writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor
shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of
compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance
company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation
laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and
others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building
r` and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the
"Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible
with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend,
r» indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any
I character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons
or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the
execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the
i failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to
pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including
attorney's fees.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent
Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the
Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the
Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the
Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
r* 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as
hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried
with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection
L' with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering
the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to
r contract execution.
A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500,000 Combined Single
Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived)
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement
doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
c
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurancepolicy naming the City
of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows:
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit. This
policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowiied
Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the
endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 1001/o of the total contract price (100% of
potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of 1,000,000 on all contracts with coverage
to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -
insure issued by the commission, or a overage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-
84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance overage for the person's or entity's employees
providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in 0406.096) - includes all persons or entities
performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of
whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has
employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies,
motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes
persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project.
"Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply
deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification odes and payroll
amounts and filing of any overage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor
Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project.
I
" 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded
the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of
the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage
with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project.
6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter.
7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the
Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons prodding services on the project that
they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
9. The contractor shall_ contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the
project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
Sling of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code,
Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of
the project;
(b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of
coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, "if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
t
during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter,
F
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision
of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs
(1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are
providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is
representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on
the project will be covered by workers's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the
coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured,
with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information
may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil
actions.
11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor
which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the
breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for
approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of
compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance
company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such
certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such
certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the
address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of
the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project
based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage
agreements;
F
r
i�
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental
entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days
after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they
are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report
failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by
the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type,
and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker
population, The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on
the sample notice, without any additional words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this
construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance This includes
persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, 'or providing labor or
transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their
employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5I2/440-3789 to receive information
on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the
required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on
the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e)
(3) of this rule;
no
11'
(iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter,
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within
10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required
by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree
not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to
job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and
other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF
MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of
subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When
Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated
have been paid, discharged or waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those
designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after
demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the
unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to
discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or
process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the
Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be
responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer
or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate
design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless
from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement.
r
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations,
which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims
arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the
Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners'
Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work.
If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without
such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the
same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into
contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein.
33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
r.. The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of
this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in
the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this
contractual agreement.
34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and
time for completion as speed in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it
is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be
specified in the Notice to Proceed.
t If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper
extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding
of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (One
Hundred) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each
and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the
work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic
change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and
extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is
agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for
payments or from final payment.
It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract.
35. TMM AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
*" It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be
allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most
conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the
work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications,
and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work
`` done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing
work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the
Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which
shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the
several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
36. EXTENSION OF T ffi
The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has
considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor
will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the
Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered
in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for
an. extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an
extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (16) days after receipt of a written request for
an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to
the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City
Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether
growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the
work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such
expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to
Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid
contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let
on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other
contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the
estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract,
they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their
proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to
be fin-nished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this
contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the
project.
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered,
which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any
damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on
account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the
Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing
out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the
existence or character of the work.
r
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the
Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and
stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto,
which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all
materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly
performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications,
plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
i
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either
wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at
any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate
showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made,
Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by
reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a
waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial
C payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by
the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical
the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement
shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work
1 The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's
Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which S% shall be retained until final
payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this
agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by
Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the
Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion
r of the retained percentage due Contractor.
43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said
time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the
Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the
duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
44. FINAL PAYMENT
Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and
prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and
shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual
obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the
I� Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall
relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if
any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
F.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on
account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his
own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the
contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or
replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written
notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner
or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
47. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to
such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will
protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheldbecauseof them.
48. TAKE OF FILING CLAIMS
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in
writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any
directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to
such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal
from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative
and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's
Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of
the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents.
49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from
the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply Rath the orders of the Ovmer's Representative,
when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on
the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the
Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment,
tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for
work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of
the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra
Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of
such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten
(10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following
�. elective manners:
i
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said
Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment,
tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the
Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under
and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under
this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference.
In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had
been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to
the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a
general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under
substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to
the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase
shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to
complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work
under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of
completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized
statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct: shall then be prepared and
delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the
balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been -the
cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor
and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools,
1 materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to
complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner
within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the
site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written
notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be
held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect
such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools,
materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale
may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or, supplies which remain on the +jobsite and belong to persons other than the
Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms
within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the
work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been
included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's
Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value
of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially
completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or
provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor
to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final
statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and
all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner
who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance
shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
51. BONDS
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, _
Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds
$25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if
required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to
do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict
with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control.
53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or —
from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the
Contractor at his own cost and expense:
54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct,
supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The
fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and
to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative
hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent
contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other
person, firm, or corporation.
55. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the
completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave
the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may
remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
No Text
Resolution #2502
January 8, 1987
Agenda Item #18
DGV:da
RESOLUTION
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general
prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or
mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock
*in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719
enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February
23, 1984; and
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order
to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works
.contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which
exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents
and purposes: _
Exhibit A: Building Construction'Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades
Exhibit C: Electrical Trades
Exhibit D: Overtime Rate
Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing
rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken
on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in
all public works contracts as provided by law.
Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987.
Ranettd,,Boyd, City Secretary •
APPROVED TO ONTENT:
Bill- P•yne, D rector of Building
Services
B.C. McMINN, MAYOR
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
-.?� � il
Miild G. Vandiver, First
Assistant City Attorney
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft
Hourly Rate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
$11.60
Air Conditioner Installer
8.35
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
5.50
Bricklayer
10.50
Bricklayer -Helper
5.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
5.50
Cement Finisher.
7.35
Drywall Hanger
8.70
Electrician -
10.50 --
Electrician-Helper
5.25
Equipment Operator -
Heavy
8.00 .
Light
5.70
Floor Installer
8.00
Glazier
7.50
Insulator, Piping/Boiler
9,50 -
Insulator -Helper
5.00
Iron Worker
7.30
Laborer, General
4.75 -
Mortar Mixer
5.60
Painter
8.75
Plumber
9.25 _
Plumber -Helper
6.00
Roofer
7.65
Roofer -Helper
4.75
Sheet Metal Worker
8.75 _
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
5.50
Welder - Certified
8.00
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft
Asphalt Heaterman
Asphalt Shoveler
Concrete Finisher
Concrete Finisher -Helper
Electrician
Flagger
Form Setter
Form Setter -Helper
Laborer, General
Laborer, Utility
Mechanic
Mechanic -Helper
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
Asphalt Paving Machine
Bulldozer
Concrete Paving Machinist
Front End Loader
Heavy Equipment Operator
Light Equipment Operator
Motor Grade Operator.
Roller
Scraper
Tractor
Truck Driver -
Light
Heavy
Hourly Rate
$5.25
4.75
7.35
4.75
10.50
4.75
6.50
5.50
4.75
5.80
6.50
6.00
6.00
5.25
6.50
5.85
6.40
6.40
8.00
5.25
5.25
5.50
5.25
5.25
EXHIBIT C
Electric Construction Trades
P '1' W R
-
reva> >ng
age ates
Craft
Hourly Rate
Power Line Foreman
- $11.00 "-
Lineman Journeyman
10.45
Lineman Apprentice Series
8.90
Groundman Series
7.25
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing
Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime
(in excess
of forty hours
per week) is 1 1/2
times base rate.
EXHIBIT E
Prevailing
Wage Rates
Weekend and
Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend
and holiday
is.l 1/2 times
base rate.
I
W
z
0
a
U
U
a
Municipal Square Renovations
1016 Texas Ave.
City of Lubbock, Texas
March 1995
Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Architects -Planners
GHA, Inc. Project 9419
Table of Contents
Bidding Conditions
Provided by City of Lubbock
Division 1
General Requirements
01010
Summary of Work
01040
Coordination and Meetings
01090
Reference Standards
01300
Submittals
01400
Quality Control
01500
Construction Facilities
01600
Material and Equipment
01700
Contract Closeout
Division 2
Site Work
02050
Demolition
Division 3 Concrete
03300 Concrete Work
Division 4 Masonry
Not Used
Not Used
TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 1
r
r
r
r
Division 6
Wood and Plastic
Not Used
Division 7
Thermal and Moisture Protection
07900
Joint Sealers
Division 8
Doors and Windows
08100
Hollow Metal Frames
08210
Wood Doors
08705
Door Hardware
08800
Glazing
Division 9
Finishes
09260
Gypsum Board Systems
09311
Ceramic Tile Finish
09511
Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
09650
Resilient Flooring
09900
Painting
Division 10
Specialties
Toilet Accessories
10800
Division 11
Equipment
Not Used
Division 1.2
Furnishings
Not Used
Division 13
Special Construction
Not Used
Division 14__
Convevine Svstems
Not Used
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC-2
7 Division 15 Mechanical
15010
15020
General
Testing
15060
Piping.
15250
Insulation
15400
Plumbing
15804
Ventilating
r
15840
Ductwork
15870
Grilles, Registers, and Ceiling Diffusers
Division 16
Electrical
16010
General Electrical Provisions
16110
Raceways
16120
Conductors
16130
Boxes and Fittings
r
16140
Wiring Devices
"
16170
Switches and Fuses
16450
Grounding
16500
Lighting
r
17
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 3
P
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART1 GENERAL .
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
B.
Owner's responsibilities.
C.
Contractor's use of site and premises.
rE"
D.
Owner occupancy of the facility.
k
E.
Contingency allowances.
i
F.
Project completion time.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Work of this project covers the renovations, modifications, and additions to the existing facilities
for compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act.
B.
As shown on the drawings, this project includes replacement of identified- plumbing fixtures,
suspended ceilings, light futures, air distribution grilles, and interior finishes in existing toilet
rooms.
C.
New construction includes the remodeling of existing toilets, addition of handicap accessible ramp,
new signage and related miscellaneous work.
1
D.
Work also includes the coordination of the toilet renovations with the building occupants. There
must be at least two men's and two women's toilet rooms available to staff and general public
during normal business hours. The location of these toilet rooms shall be clearly identified by
preprinted signs, maps, or other means of communication,
1.4 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Assist the contractor in maintaining job site safety by instructing employees of the potential dangers
at the site.
B. Provide access for the contractor to portions of the existing building as required for this project.
C. Provide parking and storage space for contractor's employees, and equipment, and materials.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
7
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Limit the use of site and premises to allow: —
1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by others.
3. Use of site and adjacent building premises. ^
B. Provide safety warning barriers and signs to control access to work areas by general public.
1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY —
A. The owner will occupy the site and adjacent building during entire period of construction for the .
conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate owner's operations.
1. Temporary interruptions must be scheduled at least 48 business hours in advance with the ,
architect.
C. Schedule the work to accommodate this requirement.
D. Contractor is responsible for the safety of visitors to the job site.
1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES _
A. There is not an allowance included in this project.
1.8 PROJECT COMPLETION TIME
A. The entire scope of work included in this contract shall reach substantial completion within 45
working days.
B. See Article 34 of the General Conditions, Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages.
C. See Article 35 of the General Conditions, Time and Order of Completion.
D. See Article 36 of the General Conditions, Extension of Time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2
f
r SECTION 01040
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
r
PART1
GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
k
t
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coordination.
B.
Renovation project procedures.
C.
Preconstruction conference.
1.3 COORDINATION
A.
Contractor shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of specifications
to assure efficient aad orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with
provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B.
Contractor shall coordinate completion and clean up of work in preparation for substantial
completion.
C.
Contractor shall coordinate all construction activities and storage of materials with the architect and
project representative so as to minimize disruption of activities at the facility. The facilities shall
continue their daily activities throughout the life of this contract.
�..
D.
The contractor shall coordinate all utility interruptions with the architect and project representative
at least 48 business hours in advance.
7.
1.4 RENOVATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
A.
Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and
extending work.
B.
Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide: a means of restoring
products and finishes to original condition.
C.
Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work
to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. Notify architect if conditions will not
allow an acceptable transition.
D.
When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate
existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to the
T
architect.
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01040 - 1
° 1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Underground utilities: Failure of the drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealed
piping, wiring and the like shall not be construed as a guarantee on the part of the architect or the
owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavation or
removals shall be done at the risk of the contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to
protect employees and the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to existing systems.
B. Damage to existing systems: Whether exposed or below grade, any piping (such as piping for gas,
water, waste, vent, drainage, sewer, heating, or cooling systems, etc.) or wiring (such as wiring
for electric lighting, power, public address, telephone, or signalling systems, etc.) which is
encountered during the construction period and becomes damaged shall be repaired or replaced at
a mutually agreed price. Only life and property threatening conditions may be repaired prior to a
fully executed field order.
1.6 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Attendance: After award of contract and prior to start of construction, contractor's direct
representative, major subcontractors, state employees responsible for project, architects and
engineers shall attend conference. Time and location as mutually agreed.
B. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in contract.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Use of premises by owner and contractor.
8. Owner's requirements.
9. Security and housekeeping procedures.
10. Schedules.
11. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01040 - 2
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Quality assurance.
B.
Schedule of references.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
General Conditions: Reference Standards.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by
applicable codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents.
C.
Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
D.
Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
E.
The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract
documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.4
SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
AA
Aluminum Association
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ADC
Air Diffusion Council
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America
AIA
American Institute of Architects
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
1995 Green Hovey A=iun. Inc.
vmuthoriwd &pliarion prohibited. REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APA
American Plywood Association
ARI
Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
AWS
American Welding Society 'J
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BIA
Brick Institute of America
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
FGMA
Flat Glass Marketing Association -
FM
Factory Mutual System
FS
Federal Specification
GA
Gypsum Association
ML/SFA
Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers —
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
PCA
Portland Cement Association
PS
Product Standard
REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090.2
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SIMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' Association
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
REFERENCE STANDARDS
01090 - 3
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Submittal procedures.
B.
Shop drawings.
C.
Product data.
D.
Samples.
E.
Manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Manufacturer's certificates.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty and closeout submittals.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or contractor's standard preprinted transmittal form.
Identify the project title, project number, numbers of copies submitted, notice of deviation from
contract documents and any other pertinent data.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal forms.
C.
Identify project, contractor, subcontractors or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification section number, as appropriate.
D.
Apply contractor's stamp, signed, or initialled certifying that review, verification of products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in
accordance with the requirements of the work and contract documents. Submittals delivered to the
architect for review that have not been stamped and initialed will be returned without review.
E.
Schedule submittals to expedite the project and deliver to the architect's business address.
Coordinate submission of related items.
F.
Identify variations from contract documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed work.
G.
Provide space for contractor's and architect's review stamps.
C 1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required identify all changes made since previous submittal. —
I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report
any inability to comply with provisions.
1.5 SUBMITTAL REVIEW
A. The architect shall affix a stamp upon the submittal with appropriate wording stating if submittal
is accepted, revised and must be re -submitted or rejected.
B. The contractor shall not begin work or order material for which a submittal is required until a —
submittal has been stamped accepted and returned to the contractor.
C. Schedule submissions at least fourteen working days before date reviewed submittal will be needed.
The architect shall be allowed fourteen working days for each submittal review.
D. The architect shall notify the contractor when submittals are reviewed and ready for inclusion into
the project. --
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within fifteen days after date established in Notice to
Proceed for architect review.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous
version.
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of work or operation,
identifying first work day of each week.
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other
logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and
duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of work at each submission.
G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery
dates, including those furnished by owner and under allowances.
1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement submit complete list of major products
proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade names, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2
r
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
_
A.
Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
�••
B.
After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with article on procedures above and for
record documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.9 PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained
by the architect.
t
B.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this project.
C.
After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for
Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.10 SAMPLES
A.
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
B.
Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors
rselected,
textures, and patterns for architect's selection.
t
C.
Include identification on each sample, with full project information.
D.
Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification sections: One sample will be
retained by the architect.
E.
Reviewed samples which may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification sections.
1.11 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for
delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified
for product data.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and contract documents.
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to architect
for review, in quantities specified for product data.
B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting
reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product but must be acceptable to
architect.
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
F -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
-
3.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
Section No.
Section Title
Paragraph
01400
Quality Control
1.7
01500
Construction Facilities
1.4
1.7
1.12
01600
Material and Equipment
1.7
01700
Contract Closeout
1.3
1.6
1.7
1.8
02050
Demolition
1.3
03300
Concrete
1.5
2.2
2.6 _
2.7
3.14
07900
Joint Sealers
1.6
08100
Hollow Metal Frames
1.6 r
08210
Wood Doors
1.3
08705
Door Hardware
1.8
1.9 _
2.3
08800
Glazing
1.6
09260
Gypsum Board Systems
1.8
09311
Ceramic Tile Finish
1.5 -
09511
Suspended Acoustical Ceilings
1.5
09650
Resilient Flooring
1.6
09900
Painting
1.7
10800
Toilet Accessories
1.6
15010
General
1.5
15020
Testing
2.1
15060
Piping
1.3
15250
Insulation
_
1.3
15400
Plumbing
1.3
15804
Ventilating
1.3
15840
Ductwork
1.3 _
15870
Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers
1.3
16010
General Electrical Provisions
1.4
3.4
16110
Raceways
3.3
16120
Conductors
1.2
16130
Boxes and Fittings
1.2
16140
Wiring Devices
1.2
16170
Switches and Fuses
1.2 -
16450
Grounding
1.2
16500,
Lighting
1.3
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 4 -
PROJECT APPLICATION AND PROJECT CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
AIA Document G722 (Instructions on reverse side) PAGE ONE OF PAGES
TO (Owner): PROJECT: APPLICATION NO: Distribution to:
❑ OWNER
PERIOD FROM: ❑ ARCI-IITECT
TO: ❑ CONSTRUCTION
MANAGER
ATTENTION:
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER:
ARCHITECT'S
PROJECT NO:
0
PROJECT APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Application is made for Payment, as shown below, in connection with the Project.
AIA Document G723, Project Application Summary, is attached.
The undersigned Construction Manager certifies that to the best of the The present status of the account for all Contractors for this Project is as follows:
Construction Manager's knowledge, information and belief Work coy-
ered by this Project Application for Payment has been completed in TOTAL CONTRACT SUMS (Item A Totals) ............$
accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been
paid by the Contractors for Work for which previous Project Certificates
for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and Total Nei changes by Change Orders (Item D Totals) ...5
that current payment shown herein is now due.
TOTAL CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Item C Totals) ..... �
CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
By: Date:
State of: County of:
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of
Notary Public:
My Commission expires:
TOTAL COMPLETED h STORED TO DATE ............ $
(Item F Totals)
RETAINAGE (Item H Totals) .........................$
,19
LESS PREVIOUS TOTAL PAYMENTS (Item I Totals) .....$
CURRENT PAYMENT DUE (Item J Totals) .............$
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT TOTAL Of AMOUNTS CERTIFIED ...................$
In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on -site observe -
(Attach explanation it amount certified differs from the amount applied for.)
ARCHITECT:tions and the data comprising the above Application, the Architect certi-
fies to the Owner that Work has progressed as indicated; that to the best
of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief the quality of the
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents; anti that the Con-
tractors are entitled to payment of the AMOUNTS CERTIFIED.
By: Date:
This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNTS CERTIFIED are payable only to the
Contractors named in AIA Document G723, attached. Issuance, payment and accep-
tance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or the Contractor
under this Contract.
AIA DOCUMENT G722 • PROJECT APPLICATION AND PROJECT CERTIFICATE FUN PAYMENT • JUNE 1980 EDITION • AIM►
O 1950 • T11E AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1725 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASIIINGTON, D.C. 2o00fi G722-1980
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violate* U.S. copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution.
INSTRUCTION SHEET
AIA DOCUMENT G722a
A. GENERAL INFORMATION:
AIA Document G722 is a new document to be used in conjunction with AIA Document G723, Project Application Sum-
mary. These documents are designed to be used on Projects where a Construction Manager is employed and where multiple
Contractors have separate direct Agreements with the Owner. Procedures for their use are covered in AIA Document A201/
CM, General Conditions of the Contract, Construction Management Edition,1980 Edition.
B. COMPLETING THE G722 FORM:
After the Construction Manager has completed AIA Document G723, Project Application Summary, summary information
should be transferred to the G722 form.
The Construction Manager should sign the form, have it notarized and submit it, together with G723 and a separate G702,
Application, from each Contractor, to the Architect.
The Architect should review it and. if acceptable, complete the lower Project Certificate for Payment on this form. DO NOT
SIGN A CERTIFICATION ON EACH C702 SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTORS.
The completed form should be fonvarded to the Owner. The Owner will make payment directly to each Separate Contractor
based on the amount due each as noted in Line J of G723.
C. COMPLETING THE G723 FORM:
Each separate Contractor on the Project should complete and sign AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate for
Payment, and forward it to the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager will review each separate Contractor's
Application for Payment and, if it is acceptable, complete one vertical column for each separate Contractor.
If the Construction Manager does not agree with the amounts requested by any Contractor, the Construction .Manager
should note the corrected amount in the appropriate location on G723.
One vertical column should be completed for each application period for ail Contractors involved in the Project whether
or not any amount is due the particular Contractor for the period in question. Each page should be summarized horizontally
and all pages summarized once to provide Project totals.
Project totals should be transferred to AIA Document G722, Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment.
AIA Document G702 from each of the separate Contractors should be attached to the G723 and submitted with G722 to the
Architect for review and appropriate action.
AIA DOCUMENT G722a - INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR PROJECT APPLICATION AND PROJECT CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
G722a -- 1980 1180 EDITION - AIA'a - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W„ WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright taws and is subject to legal prosecution.
r+�
F
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance and control of installation.
B. References.
C. Field samples.
D. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates.
C. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality.
D. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required and standards for testing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1995 Green Harvey Awmia=, Inc.
Unauthorized dupliadon prohibited.
QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 1
F
1.5 REFERENCES
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents.
B. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from
architect before proceeding.
D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract
documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
E. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete,
Steel, and Bituminous Materials Used in Construction.
1.6 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications sections for review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. _
C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample
has been accepted by architect. —
1.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Owner may employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory or owner may use its
own personnel and facilities to perform inspection and testing laboratory services.
B. The testing laboratory will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual
specification sections and as required by the architect.
C. Reports will be submitted to the architect, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of test
and indicating compliance or non-compliance with contract documents.
D. Cooperate with testing laboratory: furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools,
storage and assistance as requested.
1. Notify architect and testing laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations
requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with testing laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests
required for contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the
same testing laboratory on instructions by the architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to
the contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the contract sum/price'.
QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 3
4
r SECTION 01500
I
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
r
11.2
SECTION INCLUDES
rA.
Sanitary Facilities: contractor's employees, state employees and public.
f
B.
Temporary Utilities: Electrical, water, sewer, gas and telephone.
C.
Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the work, and water control.
D.
Construction Facilities: Parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings.
I^
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
1.4
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities may be used by
construction crews.
B.
Provide suitable temporary toilet facilities as required. Submit proposed toilet facilities, locations,
and signage to owner for review and approval.
1.5
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A.
Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary piping and wiring required for construction.
B.
Contractor shall provide construction meter loop for temporary power and pay cost of electrical
power used for construction.
C.
Contractor shall provide construction water and pay cost of water used for construction.
D.
Contractor shall provide all service equipment and gas required for construction.
E.
All temporary utility connections and distribution shall be approved by owner and respective local
it
utility companies, and shall be removed by contractor at completion of construction.
1.6
TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES
A.
Provide weather tight enclosure with lights, telephone and layout table for drawings.
B.
Facility shall be large enough to allow for at least three people and stand and meet comfortably.
e 1995 Green Harvey Associates. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
01500 - 1
-9
1.7 BARRIERS
A. Provide suitable barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas while still allowing _
access for owner's useof site. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage
during construction operation and demolition. Type of barrier to be used will be at the discretion
of the contractor and the circumstance involved. The contractor to submit proposed barrier for
review and approval by owner. B. Protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
C. Clearly post warning signs all around the work sites. Signs are to be secured to the barriers. _
D. Suitable barriers include durable solid partitions, chain -link fences, temporary dust and acoustic
partitions and woven fabric. Suitable barriers do not include ropes tied to saw horses or similar
devices.
1.8 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site for positive drainage around new construction. Maintain excavations free of water.
Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment when necessary.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from —
soil erosion.
1.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification
sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate '—
work area to minimize damage.
C. Prohibit traffic through landscaped areas.
1.10 SECURITY
A. Contractor shall provide security and facilities to protect work, and existing facilities, and owner's _
operations directly adjacent to new construction from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
B. Coordinate with owner's security program.
1.11 PARKING
A. Arrange for temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel
B. Coordinate with owner for owner's employee parking.
C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking.
1.12 PROJECT SIGNAGE
A. Contractor and sub -contractors may use one combined sign measuring 4 feet wide and 8 feet high _
mounted securely to sign posts. If the contractor wishes to use a sign, the architect/owner shall
review wording and location before sign is to be installed.
B. If requested, the contractor shall install architect's job sign on contractor -supplied sign posts as —
directed by the architect.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 2
1.13 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean orderly
condition.
B. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off -site.
1.14 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to
substantial completion inspections.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
D. Remove all job signs. barriers, fences, controls and repair holes dug for posts; regrade lawn as
necessary.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 3
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Products.
B.
Transportation and handling.
C.
Storage and protection.
D.
Product options.
E.
Substitutions.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Instruction to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.
1.4
PRODUCTS
A.
Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming
the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying,
and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for
reuse.
B.
Do not reuse materials . and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by the contract documents or as approved by the architect.
C.
For similar components provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer.
1.5
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,
and products are undamaged.
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage.
1995 Gran Harvey AsuciaW. Inc.
unauihorired auplkafion pmbibited. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -1
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery:
1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in undamaged condition in
manufacturer's original unopened containers or packaging with identify labels intact and
legible.
2. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to
facilitate inspection prior to installation in order to avoid unnecessary delays in the
construction process.
B. Storage:
1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled
enclosures.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
3. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or
protection.
4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
S. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Provide mixing
with foreign matter.
6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
C. Handling:
1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by the manufacturer or
as required to protect form damage during storage and installation.
1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and
meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit
a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Instructions to bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the
bidding period to requirements specified in this section.
B. Substitutions may be considered after the bid date only when a product becomes unavailable through
no fault to the contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
contract documents.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2
D. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor:
` 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level
of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the
work to be complete with no additional cost to owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become
apparent.
° 5. Will reimburse owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by
authorities.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product
data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the
contract documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to on
proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product's equivalence.
3. The architect will notify contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.
1.9 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION METHODS OPTIONS
A. Where contract documents indicate no specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ
standard industry practices.
B. Where contract documents indicate a specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ
the method indicated or, at his option, may submit a written request for an alternate method of
construction.
C. Architect/engineer will consider written requests for alternate construction methods, if received in
time as to allow for review and return of such requests and for alternation to be made with no delay
to total construction methods. See contract for total working days allowed.
D. Submit separate requests for each alternate. Support each request with three copes of complete
details and/or documentation for alteration.
1. Indicate changes of materials to be used.
2. Show significant effects of alterations to other affects of alterations to other affected areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
rZfe 11[ikVC
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3
F111
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Closeout procedures.
B.
Final cleaning.
C.
Adjusting.
D.
Project record documents.
E.
Operation and maintenance data.
F.
Warranties.
G.
Spare parts and maintenance materials.
H.
System start-up.
1.3
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that contract documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected,
and that work is complete in accordance with contract documents and ready for architect's
inspection.
B.
Submit final application for payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous payments, and
sum remaining due.
1.4
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B.
Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D.
Replace filters of operating equipment.
E.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters,downspouts, and drainage systems.
1"5 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duptication prohibited. - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 — 1
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work:
1. Contract drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by addenda and modifications.
E. Record documents and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original contract drawings.
F. Submit documents to architect with claim for final application for payment.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit two sets prior to final payment, on 8-1/2 x 11 inch pages, bound in three ring binders with
durable plastic covers.
B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions% title of project,
and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description
identified.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2
r
7
E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of architect, contractor,
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification
section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors
and suppliers. Identify the following:
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment.
3. Parts list for each component.
4. Operating instructions.
5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods
and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
1. Shop drawings and product data.
2. Air and water balance reports.
3. Natural gas pressure test and certification.
4. Contractors' Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. Use latest version of AIA
Documents G706 and G706A.
5. Certificates issued by the architect; change orders, addenda, field reports, etc.
6. Photocopies of manufacturers' warranties and bonds.
7. Contractor's and Sub -Contractors' warranties.
H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection.
I. Submit revised final volumes within 10 days after final inspection.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of manufacturer's warranties.
B. All material, equipment, and labor provided under this contract shall carry a one year warranty by
the general contractor. The warranty period begins as established by the Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
C. Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
D. Provide table of contents and assemble in three D size ring binder with durable plastic cover.
E. Submit prior to final application for payment.
F. For items of work delayed beyond date of substantial completion, provide updated submittal with
p!�! 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
ll
1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by owner and obtain receipt prior to final
payment.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3
i
7
1.10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Preparation:
1. Notify architect seven days prior to start-up of each system.
2 Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,
drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions , which may cause
damage.
3. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
4. Verify wiring and support components are complete and tested.
5. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative in
accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
6. Instruction.
7. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing
maintenance and shutdown of each piece of equipment to owner's personnel two weeks
prior to date of final inspection.
8. Amount of time to be devoted to instruction shall be reasonable and consistent with size
of installation and its complexity.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4
F
r - SECTION 02050
DEMOLITION
PART 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities.
SUBMITTALS
A. The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of salvage and demolition work shall be submitted
for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful removal and
disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is to remain
undisturbed, and coordination with other work in progress. The procedures shall include detailed
description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of
operations.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The work includes demolition or removal of existing construction indicated or specified. All
materials resulting from demolition work, except as indicated or specified otherwise, shall become
the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the limits of owner's property.
B. Maintain a clean and organized job site throughout the demolition phase of the work.
DUST CONTROL
A. The amount of dust resulting from demolition shall be controlled to prevent the spread of dust to
occupied portions of the building and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Use
of water will not be permitted when it will result in, or create, hazardous or objectionable conditions
such as ice, flooding and pollution.
B. Maintain barriers until that portion of the project is complete.
PROTECTION
A. Protection of Existing Work: Before beginning any demolition work, the contractor shall carefully
survey the existing work and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the
work. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure against damage to existing work
to remain in place, any damage to such work shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to
the owner. The contractor shall carefully coordinate the work of this section with all other work
and construct and maintain shoring, bracing and supports, as required.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
�w • 1995 Green Harvey Anmiates. Inc.
Umuthorimd duplication prohibited.
ri
DEMOLITION
02050 - 1
B. Protection of Trees: Trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition and
which are indicated to be left in place shall be suitably protected. Any tree that is damaged during
the work under this contract shall be replaced.
C. Isolate demolition areas from occupied portions of the building with suitable barriers. Suitable
barriers include dust partitions, acoustic partitions, and fencing. They do not include ropes tied to
saw horses or similar devices.
1.7 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS
A. Areas in which demolition work is to be accomplished will be available in accordance with the
provisions of these specifications. Coordinate work with owner's activities. Restrict unauthorized
access to the project site, unless other wise instructed by the architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DUST BARRIERS
A. Minimum of 12 mil poly sheets adequately secured to supports with duct tapes, staples, cleats, nails, --
etc. Replace sheet if tears or holes can not be closed satisfactory.
B. Provide an access door in dust barrier that can be locked or secured close.
C. Brightly colored warning signs are to be attached to barrier and continually maintained throughout
the life of the barrier.
2.2 ACOUSTIC BARRIERS
A. Minimum of 5/8" thick gypsum wallboard secured to metal or wood studs. Place an acoustic foam
gasket between the adjacent surfaces and the barrier. Maintain the barrier throughout the demolition
phase of the work.
B. Provide an acoustically sound access door in barrier that can be locked or secured closed.
C. Brightly colored warning signs are to be attached to barrier and continually maintained throughout
the life of the barrier.
2.3 FENCING
A. Use a minimum of construction grade chain link fabric on a metal frame. Fencing may be modular
panels secured together and to the adjacent material or metal stakes with fabric stretched across
them.
B. Provide an access gate suitable for personnel and equipment to pass through with can be locked or
secured close.
C. Brightly colored warning signs are to be attached to barrier and continually maintained throughout
the life of the barrier.
DEMOLITION 02050 - 2
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Existing Surfacing: Existing floors and wall surfaces are not to be damaged during demolition.
Protect from damage with suitable measures.
B. Other Facilities: Remove within the limits shown to a logical and straight termination as noted on
the drawings.
C. Temporary: Those materials noted to be temporarily removed, to allow access to areas affected by
this work and then re -installed to match existing adjacent materials, shall be protected from damage
and stored on site as directed.
3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS
A. Title to Materials: Title to all materials and equipment to be demolished is vested in the contractor
upon receipt of notice to proceed. Items noted to be salvaged shall be returned to the owner and
stored as directed.
B. Disposition: All materials resulting from demolition shall be disposed by the contractor in
accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and ordinances.
3.3 CLEAN-UP
A. Debris and Rubbish: Debris and rubbish shall be removed from work sites on a regular basis. Only
by prior approval of the architect will debris and rubbish be allowed to accumulate on the site for
more than a week.
B. Debris Control: Debris shall be removed and transported in a manner as to prevent spillage on
streets or adjacent areas.
C. Regulations: Applicable federal, state and local regulations regarding hauling and disposal apply.
D. Cleanliness of Site: Due to the high visibility of the site and potential danger to the public,
maintaining a clean and safe site will be critical.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION 02050 - 3
71.
j — SECTION 03300
CONCRETE WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings.
B. Metal Stair Nosings.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02514 - Concrete Walks.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Scalers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes .and Standards: Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and
standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"
2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete"
3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection"
4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"
5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Reinforced Concrete"
6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice"
B. Workmanship: The contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not
conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by the architect.
C. Design and Testing
1. The contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory
designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual
cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the architect. A proven,
established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of
5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix.
D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to
architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
1. Job site cylinders shall be taken as directed by the architect. The contractor shall notify
the testing laboratory. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders
and be responsible for their care and handling, including breaking same at laboratory.
" 1995 Green Huvey Associates. Inc.
i
Unauthorized dupli®tion prohibited. CONCRETE WORK
03300 - 1
7
2. Test results shall be furnished to the architect, engineer, and the contractor.
3. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the architect,
at any time during the progress of.the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and
facilities at all items. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the owner's expense,
including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the
contractor's expense.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, patterns, stair nosings and others as requested by
the architect.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete
reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced ^
Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete
structures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork
for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest
practicable sizes to minimise number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the
Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed
concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or good as
new.
B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class
I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark
of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished
structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on
at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square
spot footings are shown on the drawings.
2.2 STAIR NOSINGS
A. Provide Balco Inc., model number T-305 heavy duty ribbed nosing with 114 inch thick abrasive nibs
extend 1/16 inch above top of nosing. Use type 1 anchors.
B. Submit shop drawings of nosing plan and installation details.
C. Submit standard manufacturer's finishes and abrasion colors for selection.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 2
F_ 2.3 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 x 6 - W2.1 x W2.1, welded steel fabric unless other wise
noted.
C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 60
or ASTM A 499.
D. Supports for Reinforcement:
1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices
for spacing supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use
wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick,
and other devices will not be acceptable.
2. For slab -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base
material will not support chair legs.
3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,
provide supports with legs which are hot -dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless
steel protected.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C 150, type I, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to
architect.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.-
C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud,
loam or foreign matter as follows:
1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted.
3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size:
a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-
third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars of bundles or bars.
b. The limitations may be'waived if, in the judgement of the architect, workability
and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without
honeycomb of voids.
' D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1 %A chloride
ions.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3
y�
'I
G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
1. Type B, Retarding
2. Type C, Accelerating
3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding
4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating
H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by
Architect.
I. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing
not more than 0.1 % chloride ions.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated
otherwise, 112" thickness by depth of slab.
B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per square
yard, complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene -coated burlap.
D. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type
acceptable to the architect.
2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable
provisions of ASTM C 94. Use and independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used
for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.
B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials
to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1.
C. Submit written reports to the architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by
the architect.
D. Design'mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the
Drawings and schedules:
1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; WIC ratio, 0.59 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46
maximum (air entrained).
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the contractor when
characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant,
at no additional cost to the owner and as accepted by the architect. Laboratory test data for revised
mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the architect before using in
the work.
CONCRETE WORK ' 03300 - 4
r
2.7 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in
concrete as required for placement and workability.
III B. Use color admixture in concrete where noted. Submit color selection chart for approval. Color
admixture is to be added at the mixing plant not at the site.
C. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50
degrees F.
D. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -
entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
placement having air content within the following limits:
1. 5.5 % with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate
2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate
3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate
4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate
E. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
directions.
F. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing
at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control
2.7 SLUMP LIMITS
A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows:
1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3".
3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition
of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete.
4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4".
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein
specified.
B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with
insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted.
C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing
time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required.
�• D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
CONCRETE WORK
03300 - 5
k
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might
be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete
surface and adjacent materials.
C. Forms shall not leak cement paste.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surface.
Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms
only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling,
and for easy removal.
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is in accessible for cleanout, for
inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on
forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC, .or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated
to prevent form defection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least
1-1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger
than 1" diameter in concrete surface.
I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for
other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing
such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
J. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms
after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or
destroy bond with concrete.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 6
F
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,
construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete
surfaces.
E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not
use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
A. Construction Joints
1. Locate and install construction joints, where are not shown on the drawings, so as not to
impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the architect.
2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between
walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all
reinforcement across construction joints.
B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground:
1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed.
Use screed type joints equal to those manufacturer by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc.
Screed key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1/8" dowel knockouts at 6" on
centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1" stakes per ten feet of length
of material.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of
contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkhead and intermediate screed strips
for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finishes slab surface. Provide and
secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface
to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type
screeds.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7
r�
3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Coat the contact surface of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor
adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces
requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing
compounds.
B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, in amount, and under conditions
of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating
material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which
fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General:
1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
2. Add fibrous concrete reinforced to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in
amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this types of concrete. Mix batched
concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's
instruction and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion.
3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed
on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of
weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as herein specified.
4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing.
B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect, and complete the formwork
installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit
the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required.
Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings
are not used.
C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and
in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -
spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element
submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced location not farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At
each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the
concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of the mix.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate
concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 8
l
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull float
or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle
water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations.
E. Cold Weather Placing'
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which would be caused
by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein
specified.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly
heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of
placement.
3. Do not use frozen materials or material containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing; antifreeze agent or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
F. Hot Weather Placing
1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete on compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control
the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total
amount of mixing.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that the steel and
temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment
in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete.
4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work
or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having
the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as
specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks.
B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered
with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the
concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofmg, painting, or other similar system. This is the as -
cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and
parched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and
smoothed.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces
r.. occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture thatching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment 'of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9
3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material,
and as shown on the drawings.
1. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10 feet when tested _
with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After
leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and
other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane
or elastic roofing, and as shown on the drawings or in schedules.
1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for
floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened
sufficiently to permit operation of power -driver floats or both. Consolidate surface with
power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. _
Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with
a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces
to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
C. Trowel finish:
1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless
otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint, or
other thinfilm finish coating system.
2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final
troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface.
Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8"
in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which
would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Non -Slip Broom Finish:
1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platform, steps and ramps, walks and
elsewhere as shown on the drawings or in schedules.
2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the architect
before application.
E. Pattern Finish:
1. Apply pattern finish to exterior concrete ramps as shown on the drawings.
2. Use only the approved pattern finish as submitted.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period
of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface
after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than
72 hours.
CONCRETE WORK. 03300 -10
[I.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has
dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive)
during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid
f rapid drying at end of final curing period.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing
or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous
water -fog spray.
b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating
cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to
provide coverage of concrete surface and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed
in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by
waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows:
a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final
finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours).
b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance
with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within
3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing
damage during this curing period.
C. Do not apply membrane. curing compounds on surface which are to be covered
with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener,
waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other
coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the architect.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surface, including undersides of beams, supported
slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until
forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as
applicable.
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces by moist curing.
1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless specified otherwise, by methods specified above, as
applicable.
2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of
moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar
parts of the work, maybe removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24
hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form
removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams, soffits, joists, slabs and other structural
elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum
compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength if inplace concrete by
testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical
supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or
disturbing shores and supports.
3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or
otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound
material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins
and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use
patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to architect.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling -in: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete
as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling
shown or required to complete work.
B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where
indicated on the drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during
concrete placement.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas:
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms,
but only when acceptable to architect.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 113' in any dimension, and holes left by tie
rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or
proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the
areas to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement
so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of architect Surface defects include color and texture irregularities; cracks;
spalls; air bubbles; honeycomb; rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and
stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding
agent.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 12
2. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces that contain defects that adversely affect
the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, form smoothness and to verify surface
plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as
herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition
to smoothness, using a template having required slope.
2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability
of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or
which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, pop -puts, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions.
3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14
days.
4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete.
Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may
be used when acceptable to architect.
S. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound
concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance
all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with
a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place,
compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as
adjacent concrete.
6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry pack
method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout
coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part portland cement
to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as
required for handling and placing. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match
adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. .
D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by architect.
E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of architect.
3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The contractor will employ a testing laboratory. to perform all other tests and to submit test reports.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following,
as directed by the Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with
ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one test
for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231
pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 -13
w
4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and
when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.
5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction _
thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. fr. of surface
area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28
days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested
at 28 days.
a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given
class on concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.
b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the
strength test may be waived by the architect, if, in his judgement, adequate
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 % of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to the architect, engineer and the contractor on the same day
that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing services, concrete type and
class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests
and 28-day tests.
D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in
the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determined
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be
required when unacceptable concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 14
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provide caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on
drawings for interior caulking.
B.
Provide sealant where indicated on the drawings in conjunction with weather seals, and as otherwise
noted.
C.
Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming,
caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specified herein. Furnish all supplementary
items necessary.
1.3
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08110: Steel Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 09300: Tile.
C.
Section 09900: Painting.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications:
1. Minimum two years experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer's Representative:
2. Arrange for technical representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper
procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation.
1.5
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS TT-S-00230C, Type II Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
B.
FS TT-S-001543A Sealing compound: Silicone Rubber Base.
C.
FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A Joint Sealant: Self Levelling.
D.
ASTM C834 Standard Specification for latex sealing compounds.
0 1995 c`OC1 Hwy Associates,JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for
sealant, backing and related materials. _
2. Samples:
a. Color charts for selection by architect.
b. Furnish samples of custom colors.
3. Certification:
a. Letter of certification from manufacturer or certified test laboratory report that
materials are chemically compatible with each other and with substrate.
4. When requested by the Architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6 inch long
sample of each type of joint backup.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. Store in a manner to
protect materials from the weather.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warrant materials and workmanship against air and water leakage for a five-year period. _
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Pecora Chemical corporation.
B. Sonneborn Building Products.
C. W.R. Grace and Company.
D. General Electric Company.
E. Products Research and Chemical Corporation. --
F. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01630.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Polysulfide (Type I):
1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self -leveling) or Type 2
(nonsag) as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Color: As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Synthacalk GC-5, Pecora Corp.
b. 350, PRC.
C. Sonolastic, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc. _
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2
B. Modified Polyurethane (Type 2):
1. Two or three-part conforming to FS TT-S-000227E, Class A, Type H.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect. Match brick color for vertical joints; mortar
color for horizontal joints.
3. Acceptable products:
a. Dynatrol H, Pecora.
b. NP 2, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc.
C. Dymeric, Tremco.
C. Polyurethane (Type 3):
1.. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-0000227E, Class A, Type I or H.
2. Color: As selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. NR-200, Pecora.
b. No. 200, PRC.
C. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonneborn-Contech.
d. THC-900/901, Tremco.
D. Polyurethane (Type 4):
1. One -part conforming to FS TT-S-000230C, Class A, Type II.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. No. 6000, PRC.
b. NP 1, Sonneborn - Contech.
C. Dymonic, Tremco.
E. Silicone (Type 5):
1. One part rubber based silicone conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Class A, Type I.
2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect.
3. Acceptable products:
a. 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning.
b. Silproof, General Electric.
C. Proglaze, Tremco.
F. Acrylic, Solvent Cure (Type 6):
1. One -part, FS TT-S-00230.
'~
2. Acceptable products:
a. Unicrylic, Pecora.
b. Permacryl, Schnee -Moorhead Chemicals, Inc.
C. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Company.
l
G. Nondrying, Nonskinning (Type 7):
1. One -part sealing compound.
,..
2. Acceptable products:
j
a. GC-55, Noncuing, Goal Chemical.
'
b. BR-96, Pecora.
r.
C. Curtain Wall Sealant, Tremco.
-
H. Bitumen Impregnated Sealant (Type 9):
1. Precompressed bitumen impregnated foam joint sealant.
Y
2. Size: As recommended by manufacturer for joint condition as rain seal.
3. Acceptable product: Emseal compressed, Emseal Corporation.
..
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3
I. Backer Rod: Closed cell expanded polyurethane or polyethylene "Denver" foam, compatible with
sealant; sized and shaped to control depth of sealant; and to maintain 20% to 50% compression of
material.
J. Joint Cleaners and Primers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
K. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape.
L. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape.
M. Sealant Tape:
1. Compressible adhesive -cohesive tape of cross -linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that
accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement _
of+or-25%.
2. Acceptable product: PTI 606, Protective Treatments, Inc.
N. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant.
2. Acceptable project: Sonoflex F, Sonneborn.
2.3 MIXING
A. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall
be deemed as acceptance of the surface.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water
surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material, and previously applied paint or primer.
B. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant or caulk manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
C. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning and
wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and dry. Any protective coating on building materials
that will impair sealant bond shall be removed.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Sealants:
1. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life,
and application procedure.
2. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge.
Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed.
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4
3. apply sealant under pressure with having nozzle of proper size or other appropriate
j PP Y P gun g P Pe
means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints.
4. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling
r" solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant.
B. Caulking:
1. Caulking: Apply caulking joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface.
Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely
fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good
adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed.
C. Joint Size:
1. Sealant and Caulking: Depth equal to 1/3 times joint width or as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses.
B. On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth
immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed
by lightly wirebrushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains.
C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Interior and Exterior Joints Subject to Movement Including Brick Veneer but Not Including Traffic:
4 Type 1, 2, 4, or 5 at Contractor's option and as recommended by manufacturer for joint condition
and sealant color.
B. Interior and Exterior Horizontal Joints Subject to foot and Vehicular Traffic: Type 3, self -leveling.
C. Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joint Not Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 6.
D. In Contact with Roofing or Waterproofing Materials: Type 3 or 4, low modulus, unmodified.
f E. Unexposed Window Joints: Type 7.
F. Secondary Seal and Exterior Brick Expansion Joint Secondary Seals: Type 9.
r
G. Expansion Control at Joints in Structure Walls and Floors: Provide Type 2 polyurethane sealant
for surface seals.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5
r
P
SECTION 08100
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Custom fabricated rated and non -rated steel frames.
1.3
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
B.
Section 08705 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
D.
Section 09900 - Paint.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
B.
ASTM A501 - Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc Coated.
C.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
D.
NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
E.
SDI - 100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of SDI - 100.
B.
Fire rated frame construction to conform to NFPA 252.
C.
Installed door and frame assembly to conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated on
drawings.
C 1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08100 - 1
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings, anchor types, and location of cutouts for hardware
and reinforcement.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Protect frames with resilient packaging.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2
PRODUCTS --
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Republic Builders Products Corp.l Subs. Republic Steel
B.
Ceco Corporation
C.
Tex -Steel Corporation
D.
Substitutions: Under. provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
FRAMES
A.
Material: ASTM A569, hot rolled carbon steel.
B.
Frame Gage: 16 gage for interior frames.
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: SDI - 107.
D.
Dimensions: I inch return by required wall thickness, frames are to match existing frames. See
frame schedule at the end of this section.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Jamb Anchors: 'Z' type for metal studs.
B.
Silencers: As specified in Section 08700.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08100 - 2
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames and assemble as a complete welded unit.
B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place.
C. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike side.
D. Fabricate jamb anchors to be set in metal stud partitions from minimum 16 gage cold rolled steel
complying with ASTM A526.
2.5 FINISH
A. Primer: Baked on.
B. Paint: As specified in Section 09900.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with SDI - 100.
B. Coordinate with gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement.
C. Install minimum of 4 anchors per jamb for frames set in metal stud framing.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to comer.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply
touch-up paint of compatible air -drying primer.
3.4 Frame Schedule
See schedule included in drawings.
END OF SECTION
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08100 - 3
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of
this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood doors fire rated and non -rated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, cutouts for glazing.
B. Samples: Submit two of door veneer, 12x12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the following:
1. ANSI/NWWDA I.S.I.
2. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152.
3. Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term:
1. Interior Doors: Two years.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR TYPES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Weyerhaeuser.
2. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
3. Truline.
B. Flush Interior Doors: 1-314 inches thick; solid core particleboard construction (ANSI A208); fire
rated as indicated.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Core (Solid, Non -Rated): ANSIINWWDA, Type solid wood block core.
° 1995 Green Harvey Assocurca. Inc. WOOD DOORS 08210 - 1
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. .
2.3
FLUSH DOOR FACING
A.
Wood Veneer: ANSI/NWWDA Custom grade; Red Oak wood, plain sliced with random match
grain, for transparent finish. Field verify that existing door used as reference standard is red oak;
if not, match the existing species.
B.
Adhesive: ANSI/NWWDA, Type I.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Glass Stops: Rolled steel type conform to UL requirements.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1 requirements.
B.
Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with ANSI/N 1WDA I.S.1 and to UL requirements.
Attach fire rating label to door edge.
C.
Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement blocking in place. —
D.
Factory machine doors for finish hardware.
E.
Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
2.6
FINISH
A.
Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
PART 3
EXECUTION —
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
C.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08111 and hardware
specified in Section 08712.
D.
Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
WOOD DOORS 08210 - 2
SECTION 08705
DOOR HARDWARE
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Hardware for new doors at District Headquarters, 05-576-050.
B.
Butts and hinges, locks and latch sets, closers, push/puns, trim units and silencers.
C.
Replace all existing door knobs with new accessible levers.
1.3
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act, 36 CFR.
B.
ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D.
BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
E.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
F.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
G.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
H.
SDI - Steel Door Institute
I.
ANSI Al15.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors.
J.
ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting.
K.
ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges.
L.
ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim.
M.
A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers).
N.
ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim.
e ins creed Harvey "n prohibited.
d. DOOR HARDWARE 08705 - 1
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
O. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinges. —
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other sections involving manufacturer of any internal
reinforcement for door hardware.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years
experience.
B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door hardware
with five (5) years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate location and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C. Provide product data on specified hardware.
D. Submit keying diagrams to show grandmaster, master, etc. level of hierarchy.
E. Submit proposed replacement levers, finish, function, and example.
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to
preventative maintenance.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match
hardware schedule.
B. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area.
DOOR HARDWARE 08705 - 2
1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.
B.
Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Locksets and Latches: Sargent; Schlage; Corbin
B.
Hinges: Stanley; McKinney; Hager
C.
Closers: Sargent; LCN
D.
Panic Devices: Sargent; Von Duprin
E.
Kickplates, stops, and silencers: Trimco; Ives; Triangle Brass
F.
Smoke seals: Pemko
G.
Thresholds: Pemko
H.
Cover Plates: National Guard Products, Inc.
2.2
STYLE
A.
New hardware components shall match existing similar components in finish, style, and function.
B.
Lubbock District administration offices shall have replacement levers similar to Sargent LNH series.
2.3
KEYING
A.
Door Locks:
1. Master keyed to match existing facility.
2. Grand master key system to match existing.
B.
Supply two keys for each lock.
2.4
FINISHES AND STYLE
A.
Finishes are identified in the schedule at end of this section. If not identified, finish is to match the
finish of an existing similar item. Submit for architect's approval.
B.
New items are to match existing style and function as closely as possible. Lockset knobs, keying
system, cylinder pins, and finishes are to match existing. Submit for architect's approval.
2.5
PLASTIC SIGNAGE
A.
Andco unframed engraving stock with radius comers, color to be selected by architect.
B.
Letter style, to be Helvetica Medium. Size appropriate for specified application and as described
in Article 4.30 of the American with Disabilities Act..
DOOR HARDWARE 08705 - 3
C. Install signs with permanent adhesive tape at sixty (60) inches above the floor to center of sign and _
a maximum of eight inches away form strike side of door frame, comply with American with
Article 4.30 of the Disabilities Act.
D. Signs are to include the message stamped in braille below the visual message.
2.6 PANIC DEVICES
A. Von Duprin 55 series, smooth mechanism case, designed for 1 3/4* thick hollow metal doors.
B. Devices are intended for door openings without a faullion.
C. Provide devices with concealed vertical rods, model 5547 and 5547-F.
2.7 PUSH, PULLS
A. Use the model listed in the hardware schedule as reference, match the existing Push and Pulls if
different than specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI,
NAAMM, AWI, ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA and DHI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Conform to ADA for positioning requirements for the handicapped.
3.3 REPLACEMENTS
A. Existing doors shown in the drawings shall have their existing latch activator replaced with a new
rod style lever (similar to Sargent LNH series) type activator meeting the Americans with
Disabilities Act criteria.
B. New replacement levers shall match the existing manufacturer, model, and finish. The new lever
shall maintain the current latch function and locking capabilities.
C. Provide a knurled grip or similar, acceptable texture on levers of doors leading to a potentially
hazardous situation for a physically or visually challenged person.
D. Maintain current keying system throughout building. Submit keying diagram and hierarchy for
review and approval of replacement levers.
DOOR HARDWARE 08705 - 4
3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HW-1
Doors Marked 2 and 3
Each to Have:
1 1/2 PR
Butts
1
Lockset
1
Wall Stop
1
Closer
1 Set
Smoke Gasket
1
Kick Plate
1
Plastic Sign
1
Plastic Sign
HW -2
Door Marked 1
Each to Have:
1 1/2 PR
Butts
1
Lockset
1
Closer
1 SET
Smoke Gasket
1
Kick Plate
1
Light Kit
FBB179 4 1/2x4 1/2 26D
Stanley
8165 LNH
Sargent
423 26D
Rockwood
4030 Series
LCN
S88D
Pemko
1029 30x36x18 ga 26D
Trimco
Men, 4x4 Handicap Emblem
Andco
Women, 4x4 Handicap Emblem
Andco
Salvage existing
Salvage existing
Salvage existing
S88D Pemko
1029 30x36x18 ga. 26D Trimco
3x33 glass opening
Balance of hardware to be salvaged from the existing door. Install salvaged hardware into new door and
make fully operational. If existing mortise lock can not be salvaged as anticipated, contractor to provide new
lock matching the exiting established style.
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE 08705 - 5
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass and glazing for sections referencing this Section for products and installation.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
B..
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
C.
Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mirrors.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B.
ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in
Buildings.
C.
ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
D.
ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
E.
FGMA - Glazing Manual.
F.
FGMA - Sealant Manual.
G.
FS TT-C-00598 -Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
H.
FS TT-S-W1657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release
Type.
I.
FS TT-S-W230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically
Curing.
J.
FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
C 1995 Gran Harvey Associates. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. GLAZING 08800 - 1
K. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Mental) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for
Channel or Stop Glazing).
L. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Glass and glazing materials of the Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and
air barrier: _
1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to
heel bead of glazing sealant. —
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of
glass as calculated in accordance with 1985 U.B.C. in accordance with ANSUASTM E330.
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product data on glass types specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental
characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements.
C. Product data on- glazing compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D. Samples:
1. Submit 2 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
2. Submit 12" x 12" piece of each glass indicated.
E. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special precautions required.
F. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and
Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.
B. Actual site measurements are the responsibrity of the contractor.
GLAZING 08800 - 2
1.10
PART 2
2.1
2.2
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040.
B. Coordinate the work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to
adjacent work.
WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. PPG Industries, Inc.
B. Ford Glass Division
C. ASG Industries
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600
MATERIALS - GLASS
A. Wire Glass - Clear
1. Type: Clear polished wire glass.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Conformance: Uniform Building Code Standard No. 43-4, ASTM 1036.
4. Acceptable Manufacturer: _ Equal to Pilkington diamond pattern. .
B. Tinted Tempered Glass
1. Type: Fully tempered light. Equal to PPG Solarcool Bronze (the supplier shall verify that
this glass appearance at the existing windows that are to remain at the exterior south wall).
2. Light Transmittance: 21 %
3. Light Reflectance: 35 %
4. Shading Coefficient: 0.45
5. Thickness: 1/8 inch
6. Conformance: ASTM 1048-85, Quality q3.
C. Insulating Glass Units
1. Manufacturers - sealed insulating glass materials
a. PPG Industries, Glass Div.
b. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co.
C. Ford Motor Co., Glass Div.
d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2. Sealed Insulating Glass Materials
a. Insulated Glass Units (Type SG -A): ASTM E774 and E773; double pane with
outer pane of 1/4 inch clear glass, inner pane of 1/4 inch clear glass, interpane
space purged dry hermetic air; total unit thickness of 1 inch.
GLAZING 08800 - 3
2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Shall conform to ASTM C669 and as required by the glazing manufacturer.
B. Butyl Sealant (Type GC-B): FS TT-S-001657; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non -
skinning.
C. Acrylic Sealant (Type GC-C): FS TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A; single component; cured Shore
A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
D. Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D): FS TT-S-00227, Glass A Type H; two component; cured Shore
A hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
E. Polyurethane Sealant (Tupe GC-E): FS TT -5-00230, Type II -non -sag, Class A; as recommended
by the manufacturer.
F. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): FS TT-S-01543, Class A; single component; chemical solvent
curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25
color as selected.
2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square
foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x
one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore
A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
color: black.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS
A. Provide testing and analysis reports of glass under provisions of Section 01400.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION -
A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01040.
B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive glazing.
GLAZING 08800 - 4
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D.
Remove all evidence of existing putty glazing from existing steel frames scheduled to be reglazed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass,
glazing sealants, and gaskets, to achieve airtight and watertight performance, and to minimize
breakage.
B.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation
and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance.
C.
Set, units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
C.
Remove labels after work is complete.
D.
Clean glass.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
C.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
D.
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
E.
Remove and replace glass which is broker, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
GLAZING 08800 - 5
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Metal stud wall and wall furring.
B. Metal channel ceiling framing.
C. Gypsum board.
D. Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
B. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling Furrdown Construction.
C. Section 09900 - Painting: surface finish.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
B. ANSI/ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board.
C. ANSI/ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
D. ANSI/ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
E. ANSI/ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material to Light
Gage Steel Studs.
F. ANSI/ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
1"5 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
unaudiorixed duplication prohibited. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 1
G.
ANSI/ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
H.
GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
I.
GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
1.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Fire Rating Wall Requirements: 1 hour in accordance with UL 1988 listed assembly No. U465.
B.
Fire Rating Sub -ceiling Requirements: 1 hour in accordance with UL 1988 listed assembly No.
G501.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with three years' documented
experience.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable codes for fire rated assemblies
1. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL.
2. Fire Rated Ceilings: Listed assembly by UL.
1.8
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape decorative finish, and accessories.
B.
Submit two samples of predecorated gypsum board 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating decorative finish.
Selection will be made from manufacturer's standard selections by the architect. _.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01340.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
A.
United States Gypsum Co,
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1. Gold Bond Products, Inc.
2. Redman Industries Inc.
C.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 2
2.2
FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Interior Framing
1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, 'C' shape.
2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645.
..
B.
Fasteners: ANSI/ASTM C1002
C.
Adhesive: ANSI/ASTM C557 and as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3
GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
r
4
A.
Standard Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length, ends
square cut, tapered edges.
B.
Gypsum Board for Backup: ANSI/ASTM C36; 3/8 inch thick, ends square cut, tapered edges.
C.
Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Corner Beads: Metal equal to Dur-A-Bead #101 by United States Gypsum.
!
B.
Edge Trim: Metal equal to No. 200-A by United States Gypsum.
C.
Control Joints: Metal equal to No. 093 by United States Gypsum.
D.
Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound._, adhesive, water, and
fasteners.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.2
METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A.
Install studding in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C754.
4'
B.
Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.
C.
Partition Heights: To minimum 6 inches above suspended ceilings. Install additional bracing for
r
partitions extending above ceiling.
D.
Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side
!. r"
of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs.
'..
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 3
4
{
i
E. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet
partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware.
F. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work placed in or
behind partition framing.
3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to masonry and plaster walls, attached by adjustable
furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
B. Erect furring studs vertically. Secure in place at maximum 16" on center.
C. Space furring studs maximum 16' on center.
D. Install thermal insulation batts between studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216. _
B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above -ceiling work.
D. reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring
channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of —
openings.
E. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
3.5 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items with or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through
partitions.
B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
1. Metal framing: two beads.
2. Face layer. _
3. Calk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, ductwork, rough -in boxes, and all other
wall penetrations.
3.6 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216.
B. Erect single layer of gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring
over firm bearing.
C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 4
3.7
3.8
D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm
bearing.
E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
F. Treat cut edges and holes in gypsum sheathing with sealant, or tape.
G. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed.
H. Place corner beads at external corners as indicated. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim
where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
JOINT TREATMENT
A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and comers to produce smooth surface ready to receive
finishes. -
B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
C. Erect pre -decorated gypsum board vertically, with exposed batten fastening system.
D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
09260 - S
7 SECTION 09311
7
CERAMIC TILE FINISH
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The latest editions of the following specifications and references govern the work in this section and
constitute minimum requirements.
Where specific requirements of this section are more stringent,
they shall supersede the corresponding requirements of these reference specifications.
1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) Standards:
a. A108.1-1985
Installation of Glazed Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile,
Quarry Tile and Paver Tile with Portland Cement
Mortar.
b. A108.4-1985
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water -Resistant
Organic Adhesives.
C. A108.5-1985
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland
Cement Mortar of Latex -Portland Cement Mortar.
d. A118.1-1985
Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar.
e. A118.4-1985
Latex -Portland Cement Mortar.
f. A118.6-1985
Ceramic Tile Grouts.
g. A136.1-1985
Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.
(R1972)
2. American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a. A 185-85
Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain for Concrete
Reinforcement.
b. C 144-84
Aggregate for Masonry.
C. C 150-84
Portland Cement.
d. C 206-84
Finishing Hydrated Lime.
C. C 207-79 (R1984) Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
f. C 395-85
Chemical -Resistant Resin Mortars.
3. Tile Council of America,
Inc. (TCA):
a. TCA 137.1
Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic
Tile. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. The types
of work of this section include:
I r- 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile.
2. Ceramic Cove Base, Molded Comers, Bullnoses.
3. Glazed Wall Tile.
C° Green Haney
Unauthorized dupl'auon prohibited. CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tile Manufacturing Standard: TCA 137.1. Furnish tile complying with standard grade
requirements unless indicated otherwise.
B. Proprietary Materials: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in'
compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting
materials.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range
of colors available, for each tile specified. Include samples of grout and accessories requiring color
selection.
B. Furnish the manufacturer's signed Master Grade Certificates for each type of tile specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in accordance with
referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Tile Products:
1. Glazed Wall Tile: 2" x 2" cushion edge, gloss glaze of colors equivalent to American -
Olean Chart A-1.
2. Accent Stripes: Provide an accent stripe in rooms H100 and H2O0 of 2" square tile of
same construction as field tile. Color to be equivalent to color selected from American -
Olean Chart A-1. The accent stripe shall be one full tile above the door frame.
3. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: Standard grade, not less than 1/4" thick with
cushion edges. Provide all necessary shapes and trimmers of similar tile. Pattern selection
will be block random or medley random using 2", 2" x 1" and/or 1" x 1" tie sizes. Color
and pattern selections will be equivalent to American -Olean Price Range B.
5. Trim and Special Shapes: Rounded external comers and trim shapes at head, jamb and
sills of openings, of same material and finish as field tile and as follows:
a. Base: Sanitary cove units.
b. External Comers: Bullnose shapes, with a radius of not less than 3/4" unless
otherwise shown.
C. Internal Comers: Field -butted square, except use square comer, combination
angle and stretcher type cap.
CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 2
ti
B. Mortar and Grout:
1. Portland Cement Mortar and Grout: ANSI A 108.1.
a. Provide reinforcing wire fabric.
b. Color pigment: Mineral oxides, unaffected by lime, cement or weathering. Use
when required to produce selected grout color.
2. Dry -Set Mortar: Factory -sanded portland cement and additives; ANSI A 118.1. Use only
r.. the type of dry -set mortar to set types of tile for which they are labeled.
3. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: Latex modified portland cement dry -set mortar; ANSI
- 118.4.
4. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A 136.1; of proper type for intended use with respect to
moisture resistance, tile material and backing as certified by adhesive manufacturer.
a. Provide Primer -sealer where recommended by manufacturer.
5. Dry -Set Grout: Proprietary compound composed of portland cement and additives
formulated for the type of tile installed. Color as selected by architect from manufacturer's
standard.
6. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: Proprietary compound composed of portland cement with
latex additive for a more flexible and less permeable grout. Color as selected by architect
from manufacturer's standard.
7. Provide product with latex additive which is compatible with latex additive in latex-
portland cement mortar.
C. Extra Materials:
1. Provide one unopened carton of each file used on the project. Clearly identify on the
carton the tile type, color, size, building in which it was installed, and name and number
of room installed.
2. Deliver extra cartons to project site for verification. Owner will store cartons at their
preference.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Tile Installation Standards: .
1. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following, except as
otherwise indicated.
a. ANSI A108.1: ANSI 108.4 or ANSI 108.5, as applicable.
2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for mixing and installation of proprietary
materials.
3. Extend tile work into recesses under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at
obstruction, edges and comers without disruption pattern or joint alignment.
4. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit file closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
B. Placement Methods:
1. Thin -set Installations: Dry -set portland cement mortar, latex-pordand cement mortar, or
organic adhesive, to suit substrate.
2. Submit for review and approval a water resistant adhesive for all floor tile installations.
Adhesive is to form a continuous waterproof coating under the floor tile and behind the
base tile. Stop coating at the top of the base tile.
CERAMIC TILE FINISH 09311 - 3
3.2
C. Jointing Pattern:
1. Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting. Provide
uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown.
2. Neatly place tiles uniformly spaced around floor drains, wall hydrants, or other finished
items that do not include cover plates to conceal uneven edges or spacing.
D. Expansion and Control Joints:
1. Provide openings for joints where shown and to comply with details, or if not shown and
detailed, to comply with recommendations in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation." Sealant work is specified in Section 07900.
2. All vertical wall intersections shall have a continuous bead of water and mildew resistant
sealant from floor to ceiling. The sealant color shall match that of the grout.
E. Grout:
1. 11.7.1 Use dry -set grout or latex-portland cement grout as recommended.
CLEANING
A. Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
B. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by_ tile and grout
manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with
clean water before and after cleaning.
C. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, shipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise
defective tile work.
D. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering
during construction period to prevent damage and wear.
E. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least three days after grouting is
completed.
F. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
CERAMIC TILE FINISH_ 09311 - 4
SECTION 09511
i!
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 GENERAL NOTES
A. This contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all acoustical ceiling work
as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. This contractor shall be responsible for the
furnishing and installation of all accessories required for the completion of the work.
B. See reflected ceiling plan for locations of electrical and mechanical items related to the acoustical
ceilings. Cooperate with electrical and mechanical contractors to insure a first class appearance in
the completed work.
1.3 COOPERATION
3� A. This contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling
installation to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this contract. Installation of tile
shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been obtained to proceed. The contractor
shall give the architect advance notices for such operations.
B. The contractor shall inspect personally all surfaces to receive material and shall report to the
[ architect any defects or conditions which would affect his installation.
C C. This contractor shall cooperate with the electrical contractor and carpentry contractor to see that a
uniform border is maintained around the ceiling area, and that electric outlets are centered in a tile
where possible.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. This contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from
defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance
of his work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the
warranty.
B. The following shall be judged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping,
cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of material.
1.5 SUBMITTAL
4 ..
A. Submit to the architect for approval four sets of manufacturer's literature describing the ceiling
boards and suspension system proposed for the project.
1995 Gran Harvey Associates, Inc.
vnautnori=d dwrtition prohibited. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
j
PART PRODUCT
2.1 MATERIALS
PART 3
3.1
A. Ceiling board shall be 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches or 24 x 24 x 5/8 inches square edged, random fissured
mineral fiber with an NRC of at least .50 to .60, STC of 35 to 39, Class A rating, and a white color
coating.
1. USG Interiors, Inc. - OMNI
2. Amstrong World Industries, Inc. - MINABOARD
B. Exposed suspension system shall be equal to DONN, DX system, white enameled steel. Main
beams shall be generally spaced at 48 inches on center except where light future locations dictate
a 24 inch spacing. Use 48 inch cross tees and 24 inch sub cross tees. Wall angle shall be white
enameled steel. Provide an intermediate -duty classification.
1. Any existing suspension system that is damaged or must be replaced for any reason shall
match the existing grid.
C. Existing ceiling tiles that are to be replaced due to damage shall match the existing size, texture,
color, and pattern as much as possible. The architect shall determine if new panels match the
existing panels; those found not to match shall be replaced.
EXECUTION
EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. This contractor shall employ workmen who are experienced in the erection of the types of ceilings
specified and shall maintain competent supervision of the work at all times.
B. Erect runner level and true to the elevation shown on the drawings. Start channels a minimum of
1 foot from walls, and space 4 foot o.c. thereafter. Where splices occur in channels, use special
splice bars as furnished with system specified.
C. Lay out ceiling work symmetrically in the various rooms with no less than one-half tile at the walls.
Cut tile accurately around electrical outlets.
D. Upon completion of the work, all file shall be cleaned and left free form defects of any kind. With
the approval of the architect, small abrasions, etc., may be -touched up with paint.
E. In general, lighting futures of fluorescent type shall be suspended directly on the runner bars.
Where fixture centers between two runner bars, both shall be main runner bars. See reflected
ceiling plans for fixture locations.
F. The use of wall angles to support more than 1 foot of suspended acoustical board ceilings will not
be permitted.
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 2
3.2 HANGERS
A. Hanger wires shall be #12 soft annealed wire. Hanger wires shall be plumb and taut in the
completed work. Slanting of hanger wires will not be permitted unless an equal and opposite hanger
wire is installed to offset the thrust of the original wire hanger. This may be done only with the
expressed permission of the architect.
B. Where hanger wires occur directly under ductwork or other overhead obstructions, provide a
trapeze of 1-1/2 inch channel iron. Install regular hanger wire at proper location along the length
of trapeze.
C. The use of bridging angles spanning between bar joists is expressly forbidden for attachment of
hanger wires for supporting ceiling suspension systems.
D. Hanger wires shall be attached to the bottom chords of bar joists or to special scissor clips attached
to steel subpurlins supporting the roof deck.
E. Where acoustical board ceilings occur below concrete structural members provide power driven
studs with eyes into vertical face of concrete joists.
3.3 EXTRA TILE
A. Upon completion of the work furnish to the owner one unopened carton of each type of acoustical
board installed in the project.
END OF SECTION
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 3
i
i
r
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient sheet vinyl and vinyl composition title flooring.
B.
Resilient base.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09680: Carpeting.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B.
FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing.
C.
FS SS-T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition.
D.
FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM
E84.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics,
sizes, patterns and colors.
B.
Submit two samples 12 z 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material
specified.
C.
Submit manufacturers samples of base material for their standard colors.
D.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
C 1995 Gran Harvey Anociaw. Inc.
Unamhorirad anplkation prohibited. RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 1
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature
stability.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and
24 hours after installation of materials.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 10 percent of the base and floor tile materials of each color selected under provisions of
Section 01700.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile Flooring: Armstron World Industries; GAF "Tarkett"
B. Base: Roppe Inc; Mercer Plastic Company, Inc.
C. Reducer Strips: Mercer Plastic Company, Inca
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Tile Flooring
1. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV, Composition 1; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8
inch thick; design as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Equal to
Armstrong World Industries Standard Excelon.
B. Base
1. Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I rubber; 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved. Color
selected by architect. Equal to Roppe.
C. Base Accessories
1. Premolded external comers, of same material, size and color as base.
D. Accessories
1. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material.
2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
3. Reducer .Strips and edge mouldings, equal to model #910 snap down moulding
manufactured by Mercer Plastics Company, Inc. Color as selected by architect.
4. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 2
'k I
PART 3 EXECUTION
6
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and are
ready to receive work.
I B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative
alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with
subfloor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum clean substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix vinyl tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D. Set flooring in place and press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce minimum number of seams.
F. Install tile with pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. Allow
minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
G. Install sheet flooring to eliminate seams.
H. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
I. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
J. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3
II„
3.4 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external comers.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 4
r
r
r
SECTION 09900
PAINTING.
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation.
B. Surface finish schedule.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames.
B. Section 08210 - Wood Doors.
C. section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Laquer, and Related Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products
with five years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years
documented experience.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on all finishing products.
B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340.
° I"S Gmen Hover Aumiaw. Inc. PAINTING 09900 - 1
Umudwized duplication prohibited.
C. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each
surface finishing product scheduled, after color selection.
D. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01340.
1.8 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide one field sample panel, 12 inches long by 12 inches wide, illustrating special texture, and
finish.
B. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the work.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. _
C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
D. Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, J
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing
and reducing.
E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures
above 55 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55 degrees F for interiors; 65 degrees F for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish. Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 50 footcandles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
1.11 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two gallon containers of each color and surface texture to owner.
B. Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. --
PAINTING 09900 - 2
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT
A.
Glidden Coatings and Resins Division of SCM Corporation.
B.
PPG Industries, Inc. Coatings and Resins Division.
C.
Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc.
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalysed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B.
Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing; free of streaks or sags.
C.
Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.3
FINISHES
A.
Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
C.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Report any condition that
may potentially affect proper application.
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
D.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or
finishing.
B.
Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
C.
Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
PAINTING 09900 - 3
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat
of etching primer.
G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose
mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering
of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.
Allow to dry.
H. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.
Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of
scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply
a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned.
Spot prime paint after repairs.
J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to
make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
Prime metal items including shop primed items.
K. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats.
L. Concrete Paving Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion
of finishing materials.
M. Hollow Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring
other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
PAINTING 09900 - 4
r"
C.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than proceeding coat unless otherwise approved.
E.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
r
F.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set.
r.,
Wipe excess from surface.
H.
Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
r
I.
Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss
varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
r
3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Refer to Section 15 and Section 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of
equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit.
B.
Paint shop primed equipment.
C.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,
brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.
D.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidently.
E.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat
black paint, to limit iof sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, and grilles, to match face
panels.
F.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
H.
Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements
indicated. Color band and identify as required.
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.6 CLEANING
A.
As work remove where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
proceeds, promptly paint
B.
During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment,
surplus materials, and debris.
C.
Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.
PAINTING
09900 - 5
t
3.7 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Steel Bollards; Steel Channel Frame for Canopy. _
B. Grating & Floor Plates (Section. 05530): Sidewalk Grate & Frame.
3.8 SCHEDULE - OF PAINTING _
A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those
listed below. The types of paint are identified with Pittsburg Paint numbers.
B. Exterior and Interior Metal:
1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat _
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide gloss enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide gloss enamel
C. Interior Wood: For paint finish
1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel
D. Interior Wood: For transparent finish
1. First Coat: Rez 77 line semi -transparent stain _
2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 sanding sealer
3. Third Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer
4. Fourth Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer
E. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings
1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide drywall sealer
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex semi -gloss enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex semi -gloss enamel
F. Galvanized Metal
1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 galvanized steel primer
2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide gloss enamel
3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide gloss enamel
G. Concrete Pavement
1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, 1L Line yellow unless noted otherwise.
(For Handicapped parking zones, apply a second coat of paint.)
END OF SECTION
PAINTING 09900 - 6
SECTION 10800
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet accessories.
B. Attachment hardware.
1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Drywall Construction: Installation of backing plate reinforcement.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Drywall Construction: In wall framing and plate for support of
accessories.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by
Physically Handicapped People.
B. ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates Bars and Strips.
C. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
D. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
E. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel
Plus Chromium.
F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
G. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
H. NEMA LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
C 1995 Gran Harvey Associates. Inc.
unauthcriu4 duplication prohibited. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1
r
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. _
B.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01340.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117:1.
1.8
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate the work of this section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and
reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories r
B.
The Bobrick Company
C.
Bradley corporation
D.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366. .
B.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
C.
Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
D.
Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof.
E.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized tamperproof.
F.
Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber, as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B.
Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2
C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
a
�- G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
1i 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
B. Stainless Steel: 18 gauge type 304 satin finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A: Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.4 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Grab Bars: Equal to Bobrick B-6206x24 & B-6206x48
B. Mirrors:
1. Non -accessible: Equal to Bobrick #B-165, 18 x 36 inch stainless steel framed glass mirror.
2. Accessible: Equal to Bobrick #B-293, 18 x 36 inch stainless steel framed glass mirror.
3. Provide one accessible mirror in rooms B 100, B200, D 100, D200, H 100, and H2O0 only.
The accessible mirrors are to be mounted above the accessible sink.
C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. Equal to Bobrick Model #B-685 at men's restroom and women's restroom.
2. Provide one dispenser in rooms D 100, D200, F 100, F200, H 100, and H2O0 only.
TOILET ACCESSORIES
10800 - 3
D. Soap Dispensers:
1. Match existing dispensers.
2. Provide one dispenser in rooms D100, D200, H100, and H200 only.
E. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle:
1. Match existing dispensers.
2. Provide one dispenser in rooms D100, D200, 11100, and H200 only.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4
SECTION 15010
GENERAL
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air-conditioning, heating, and ventilation work covered by contract documents.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and
labor as required for the installation of plumbing systems, ventilating system, and heating and air
conditioning system. All work to be accomplished as shown on the drawings.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals.
C. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit at least six copies of all data covering proposed equipment.
B. All equipment submittals shall be submitted to the architect at one time, according to Section 01300.
1.6 REGULATIONS
A. All work shall be done in strict accordance and compliance with state and local laws and in
accordance with regulations of applicable utility companies.
B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities. Maintain records of all permits at the job site.
1.7 DRAWINGS
A. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the
extent of the work. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after
equipment has been approved and directed by the architect. All materials or labor necessary to
complete the work in accordance with the intent of the specifications shall be furnished by the
contractor, without additional charge as called for in the specifications or shown on the plans.
1995 Green Hovey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. GENERAL 15010 - 1
B. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require space conditions,
supports, or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items
with the architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary because of failure
to comply with this clause, the contractor shall mach such necessary changes at his (the contractor's)
expense.
C. No material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until the contractor has verified all site and
job conditions.
D. The architect reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances
will be made for prefabricated material or on job material which cannot be used due to actual
conditions.
1.8 MATERIALS
A. If the contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials other than those specified, he shall
be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because
of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, or fuel piping requirements
resulting from substitutions shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
B. Within thirty days of being awarded the contract for the work under one of the following sections,
the contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes to use.
The list will include the following:
1. Manufacturer's names and designations that correspond to each item.
2. When submitted materials are different than specified, the submittal must include
descriptive literature and/or supplementary data and drawings.
C. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or interior quality must be replaced
by an acceptable item within two weeks following notification of rejection. If no satisfactory
material is submitted within two weeks, the architect reserves the right .to notify the contractor as
to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. The contractor shall famish six
copies of the material and the equipment list for approval.
1.9 PRECEDENCE
A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the
following sequence:
1. Soil and waste piping.
2. Duct work.
3. Cold and hot water piping. _
4. Electric wiring.
1.10 COOPERATION
A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the general contractor and all other contractors to coordinate .
their work in order to avoid interference and delays and to arrange all parts of the work in order
to coordinate in service and appearance with all other parts.
GENERAL 15010 - 2
g
i.
1.11 INTERFERENCES
A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the contractor must coordinate the work of the different
r trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural, and structural work will be
avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must
be kept as close as possible to walls, ceilings, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount
r of space, and offsets, fittings, etc. Additional material required to accomplish this, must be
furnished and installed by the contractor without additional cost to the owner.
�.. B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets or equipment may be varied a reasonable amount
I by the architect before installation; there will be no additional cost to the owner.
i
C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arranged that all parts will be available for proper
j^ maintenance.
t
1.12 CONTINUATION OF OPERATIONS
f A. The contractor shall realize that facility must remain in operation throughout the construction
period.
r B. Any interruptions in utilities shall be coordinated with the architect a minimum of 48 business hours
in advance and, if required, shall occur outside the normal operating hours of the building.
rC. At all times, special care `shall be taken to assure neat appearances in those areas being used during
the business hours. All excess materials, tools, equipment, and debris shall be removed and the
area left clean at the end of each day.
1.13 DEMOLITION
a.
A. Each contractor for each respective trade shall remove from the project site, items shown on the
plans to be removed.
B. All items to be salvaged for the owner shall be stacked as directed by the architect. If items are
not to be salvaged, they become the property of the contracto and shall be removed from the site.
C. The contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing facilities than is absolutely
r necessary. All concrete, masonry, or other rigid material to be removed shall be cored or sawn
providing the smallest possible hole to allow the installation of pipes or conduits indicated.
r PART 2 PRODUCTS
i
2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials shall be new, free of defects, and of the quality specified, unless otherwise specified.
k Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as a standard
shall bear their label.
f~
B. Each contractor shall be responsible for transportation of materials to the job and shall be
responsible for storage and protection until final acceptance of the job.
GENERAL 15010 - 3
t
C. Each contractor shall provide protection to keep all materials and equipment free from weather
damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each
day.
D. Each contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances, and all labor
required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract.
E. All workmanship shall be the highest grade and all construction shall be in accordance with the best
practice of the trade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SOUND ISOLATION
A. Isolator sizes and methods of installation are to be in accordance with recommendations from the
manufacturer. To prevent sound transmission and vibration, all operations equipment will be
isolated from the building construction by means of mountings designed to obtain the highest --
efficiency of sound isolation as manufactured by:
1. Korfund, Inc.
2. Approved equal. —
3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. The contractor for the work covered by each section of thesespecifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work.
B. All piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be supported at sufficient intervals to keep alignment, —
prevent sagging, and prevent.pipe from being supported by equipment or equipment connections.
C. Vertical pipes shall be supported from floor with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and adequately
support their weight. Vertical copper tubing, 1-1/4 inches and smaller, shall be supported at 3 foot
intervals and at the base of pipe risers. Where multiple pipes are indicated, they may be supported
on a continuous hanger; all hangers must be approved by the architect. Use of perforated straps will
not be permitted. Hangers shall be manufactured by: -
1. Unistrut.
2. Elcen.
3. Kindorff. _
4. Approved equal.
D. All horizontal pipes suspended with structure above shall be supported by hanger rods of the
following sizes:
Pipes up to and including 2". 3/8" rods
2-1/2" and 3" pipe 1/2" rods
4" and 5" pipe 5/8" rods
6" pipe 3/4" rods
E. Where pipes are supported from overhead concrete construction, the hanger rods shall be provided
as detailed on the plans.
GENERAL 15010 - 4
s
P!
F. Soil pipe shall be supported at all turns and at intervals not to exceed 5 feet on centers on straight
runs. The following table gives maximum hanger spacing for copper and steel lines, but hangers
r" are to be more closely spaced where necessary:
SIZE OF LINE
3/4" and smaller
HANGER SPACING
5'
1"
6'
1-1/4"
7'
1-112"
8'
2" to 4"
10,
Larger than 4"
12'
G. If pipes of different trades can be racked on the same supporting structure, all contractors shall
cooperate to properly locate the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of
the labor and materials involved in the installation.
3.3 FLASHING
A. Each soil pipe which projects through the roof or through a waterproof deck shall be flashed with
sheet lead weighing no less than 4 pounds per square foot. Flashing shall extend at least ten
inches in all directions from the pipe and shall be caulked into the hub joint of the pipe or turned
over into the top of the pipe. The hub joints shall be not less than six inches above the level of
the roof or deck.
B. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, pipes and conduits of any nature that penetrate the roof
! or a waterproof deck shall be run through pitch pockets in a manner approved by the architect.
E There shall be a galvanized metal umbrella clamped around each pipe and set two inches above
the pitch pocket.
3.4 FIRE PARTITIONS
A. Any penetrations through a fire wall or floor shall have the ancillar space sealed with a fire
retardant material such as Link -Seal or approved equal. Fire and smoke dampers shall be
installed where required or as shown on the drawings.
3.5 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION OF PIPES
A. Swing joints, turns, expansion loops, or long offsets shall be provided wherever shown on the
drawings and where necessary to allow for the expansion of piping within the building. Broken
ipipes or fittings due to rigid connection shall be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense.
Anchors shall be clamp type, securely fastened to the building structure, and shall be installed
where shown or as required to control expansion of the piping system.
3.6 UNIONS
A. Unions shall not be placed in any location which will be inaccessible after completion of the
- building unless shown on drawings or specified. Unions shall be installed on both sides of all
valves, regulators, check valves, traps, etc., so that such equipment may be readily disconnected.
Where copper pipe joins iron or steel pipe, an insulation union using a Bakelite insulator.
GENERAL
15010 - 5
3.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Insulated or bare pipes passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, and exposed to view, shall have
the void space and sleeve covered with heavy spun or stamped steel escutcheons, firmly secured
to the pipes. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to surround both the pipe and the
sleeves. The sleeve shall have a nickel plated finish, be fabricated in one piece, and shall be
firmly anchored in place. Snap -on type escutcheons will not be permitted.
3.8 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
A. Utility connection locations, depths, sizes, characteristics, and capacities shall be verified by each
contractor utilizing these items and any discrepancies from those shown on the plans shall be
brought to the architect's attention before bidding. Any and all utility connections shall be made
by the contractor, as required, with no increase in price to the owner.
3.9 PAINTING
A. No painting will be required where installation is concealed from view.
B. Exposed installations, in finished rooms, shall be painted to match the room finishes.
3.10 TESTING
A. The contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under Section 15020,
Testing.
3.11 ELECTRICAL
A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase, and voltage as specified and shall be of type
recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved.
B. The contractor furnishing the motor shall install it and shall furnish such motor controls and
starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches,
starting and control equipment, and the necessary wiring, shall be done as required. Conduits
from controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet and shall be attached to the
terminal housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to the motor shall be waterproof type with
neoprene jacket.
C. Where automatic controls are called for in the plumbing, heating and air conditioning
specifications, the control instruments, such as motorized damper motors, motorized valves,
thermostats, etc., shall be installed by the contractor furnishing the controls, but all wiring
necessary shall be done by the electrical contractor. The contractor furnishing the controls shall
furnish a control wiring diagram to the electrical contractor.
GENERAL 15010 - 6
i
D. Starters on air cooled condensing units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer.
Starters for heating and ventilating units shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer.
3.12 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors,
{- subject to architect's approval and/or as shown on the drawings. Pipes passing through interior
`k wall sleeves shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with
cast brass escutcheons.
B. All sleeves installed in vertical positions shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel
pipe. All sleeves in horizontal positions shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra
heavy cast iron pipe unless otherwise noted, and welded to steel plate: in vertical position as
detailed on the drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of two diameters larger than
b
the outside of pipe passing through the sleeve, and a minimum of one inrh larger than pipe plus
insulation. Insulation shall pass through sleeves.
C. Where pipe extends through exterior walls below grade, oversize pipe sleeves, two diameters
larger, made of standard weight steel pipe shall be used, and the annular space between service
pipe and sleeves shall be filled with oakum and cement, or lead where required, to make a
waterproof joint.
D. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surfaces and/or as detailed on the drawings.
Copper pipes passing through steel pipe sleeves shall be installed with rubber insulation between
- pipe and sleeves. Isolator insulation shall be similar to Johns -Manville Aeratube.
E. Where any pipe passes through fire walls, smoke walls, and concrete slabs between floors, the
contractor shall furnish and install fire seals, UL listed type LS, link -seal, as manufactured by
Thuderline Corp., or approved equal. Fire and smoke seals shall be installed in steel pipe sleeve
of correct size for pipe and insulation.
3.13 INSULATING COUPLINGS
A. The contractor shall furnish and install insulating couplings wherever piping material changes
from galvanized steel pipe to copper, or from black steel to copper, and as shown on the
drawings.
3.14 INSULATION
A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under Section 15250,
Insulation.
3.15 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES
A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, ceiling, or walls shall be provided with approved nickel
or chromium plated cast brass ceiling plates securely attached with set screws.
3.16 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION
A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the contractor from the
responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet structural, architectural, electrical,
or mechanical conditions as detailed and as specified on the drawings.
GENERAL
15010 - 7
3.17 INSTRUCTION MANUALS
A. Furnish four complete bound copies of instruction manuals on all operating equipment to owner.
The manuals are to include the following:
1. Repair instructions.
2. Replacement parts list.
3. Operating instructions.
4. Wiring diagrams.
3.18 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS _
A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the contractor shall test over a
sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus installed and
of system as a whole to the approval of the architect.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL
.•
SECTION 15020
TESTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide specified testing and test results as required by governing authority. Maintain a copy of test
results at job site.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals
B. Section 15010 - General
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.1 SUBMITTALS .
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. A letter of certification signed by the job superintendent. The letter shall certify that all tests have
been satisfactorily completed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. All testing required as part of the contract with the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating
and air conditioning contractor shall be approved by the architect before acceptance. Soil or waste
piping located underground shall be tested before backfilling. The necessary valves for cutting off
existing work which is not to be tested shall be provided.
B. The contractor shall perform the various test as specified and as required by state and local
authorities. The contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.
C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced. Tests shall be repeated until
no further leaks or defects are indicated.
1995 Green Harvey Associates. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
TESTING
15020 - 1
i.
D. Drainage Systems: The entire drainage, roof drainage, and venting system shall have all necessary
openings plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of the highest vent
stack without showing a drop of greater than four inches. When a portion of the system is to be
tested, the test shall be conducted in the same manner as described for the entire system, except that
a vertical stack ten feet above the highest horizontal line to be tested may be installed and filled with .
water to maintain sufficient pressure, or a pump may be used to supply the required pressure. The
pressure shall be maintained for four hours. —
E. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Systems: Upon completion of any part of the roughing -in and setting
of fixtures, the entire hot and cold water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of _
not less than 100 lbs. per square inch gauge, stand proof tight at this pressure for not less than eight
hours. Each particular part of the hot and cold water shall be tested as specified.
END OF SECTION
TESTING 15020 - 2 _
i
SECTION 15060
PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This contract shall include the furnishing and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15010 - General.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. Type of piping for the various systems shall be as specified.
B. Pipe ends shall be square cut. Ends of pipes shall be reamed and shall be wiped clean inside and
outside to remove cuttings. Before installation, pipe shall be stood on end and rapped sharply to
remove cuttings and other foreign material from interior.
C. Screwed joints shall be made with best linseed oil and graphite or Jointite used on male threads
only. Omit compound on two end starting threads.
D. Pipe shall be accurately cut to fit. Bending or springing of pipe will not be acceptable.
E. The various service pipes, valves, fittings, etc., running parallel with each other and close together
shall be in line with each other and shall be kept a sufficient distance from each other and other
work to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished coverings on the different service.
F. Each contractor shall furnish all foundations, structural or pipe supports indicated or called for
specifically or that may be required to support his particular equipment and material.
G. All piping except waste piping shall be installed above finished first floor slab, unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
1995 Gran Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
PIPING
15060 - 1
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Locations for various kinds of pipe materials shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
1. Type M hard drawn copper with solder fittings:
a. Vent pipes in masonry walls and elsewhere as noted.
2. Standard weight galvanized steel water piping with screwed malleable fittings:
a. Above ground vent piping two inches and smaller where constructed in plaster
pipe chases.
3. Service weight hub -and -spigot, or no hub asphalt coated cast iron pipe:
a. Underground or overhead sanitary drainage piping within the building line.
b. Above ground vent and drainage piping, except where galvanized steel or copper
pipe is allowed.
4. Type L hard drawn copper with brass solder fittings:
a. Above ground domestic water piping within the building four inches and smaller
in size.
b. Drainage pipe where shown on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COPPER WATER PIPING
A. Pipe and tubing shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the contractor
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the
structural portions of the building. Piping above ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the
building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branches from service lines may be
taken off top of main, bottom of main, or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be
required by structural or installation conditions. Service pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a
sufficient distance from other work and with not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the
different services. No water piping shall be buried in floors unless specifically indicated on the
drawings or approved. Changes in sizes shall be. made with reducing fittings. The use of long
screws and bushing will not be permitted. Furnish and install insulating couplings where copper
is connected to galvanized gteel piping or hot water heaters.
B. Drains indicated on the drawings in connection with the water distribution system shall be 1/2 inch
brass plugs. Additional drains shall be installed at low points on the hot-water and cold -water piping
and all piping shall grade down to the drains.
C. Allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction or tubing. Horizontal rums of tubing over
fifty feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or to the supporting construction about midway on
the run to force expansion, evenly divided, toward the ends.
D. Air chambers shall be provided on both hot and cold supplies near each faucet or control valve, as
applicable, and shall consist of a twelve inch length of tubing of the same diameter as the branch
supply, fitted with a cap, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. -
E. Tubing shall be cut square and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing
shall be well cleaned with steel wool before sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of
fittings and tubing when making connections. All joints shall be made with fittings. Joints for
PIPING 15060 - 2
r
7 above ground soldered fittings shall be made with a non -corrosive paste flux and solid string silver
k solder and all underground joints shall be made with solfos only. Cored solder will not be
permitted. Threaded swing joints shall be provided on all branch connections to mains and risers
to provide for expansion and contraction of tubing. Use 95-5 solder only to make joints extending
to future.
F. Underground piping shall be a minimum of 24" below finish and/or natural grades.
3.2 SANITARY PIPING
A. Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall be given a grade of 1/4 inch per foot where possible, but in
no case less than 1/8 inch per foot. Except where otherwise specifically indicated, all main vertical
soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to and above the roof lines as vents. Where
practical, two or more vent pipes shall be connected together and extended as one pipe through the
roof. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to the under side of the roof, with
horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps in pipes, using fittings as required.
Vertical vent pipes may be connected into one main vent riser above vented futures. Where circuit
vent or wet vent from any fixture is connected to a vent line servicing other futures, the connection
shall be at least three feet above the floor on which the futures are located to prevent the use of any
vent lines as a waste. Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall
be provided with end vents, unless separate venting of fixtures is noted. Branch connections to
exterior downspouts shall terminate three inches above finished grade. The cast-iron hub -and -spigot
or no hub pipe inside of buildings shall be extended six inches above ground where the lowest floor
is self-supporting. The contractor shall connect waste line from building to manhole as shown on
the drawings.
B. Changes in pipe size on waste, soil, and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings of recessed
reducers. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degrees wyes, half wyes,
long -sweep bends unless otherwise directed, except that sanitary tees may be: used on vertical stacks,
and short 1/4 bends of elbows may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction of
flow is from the horizontal to the vertical, and on the discharge from water closets.
C. Joins shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
3.3 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER VALVES AND FITTINGS
° A. Valves and fittings for all domestic cold water and hot water services shall be as follows:
1. Butterfly valves shall be Centerline Series LT or Crane #23 designed for 200 psi
r� differential pressure bubble tight shut off up to twelve inches in size and 150 psi above
twelve inches in size. Valves through 6 inches shall have a locking lever handle and above
six inches shall have a gear operator with a memory stop. Valves shall be furnished with
tapped full lug iron bodies, type 316 s.s. discs, type 304 s.s. stems, EPT or EPDM seats
and O-rings.
4 2. Gate valves three inches and smaller shall be Crane No. 428. Gate valves larger than
three inches shall be butterfly valves.
r.. 3. Lift check valves three inches and smaller shall be Crane No. 366E.
t 4. Globe valves three inches and smaller shall be Crane No. 14-1/2P. Globe valves larger
than three inches shall be butterfly valves.
5. Swing check valves three inches and smaller shall be Crane No. 137. Swing checks larger
than three inches shall be Crane No. 14493.
6. Strainers shall be 125 psi, bronze body, screwed ends, as shown on drawings.
PIPING 15060 - 3
3.4 PIPE HANGERS AND FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Pipe hangers and fixture supports shall be furnished and set. The contractor shall be responsible
for their proper and permanent locations.
B. Horizontal runs of copper tubing shall be supported by approved steel plastic coated hangers spaced
not more than eight feet on center. Horizontal runs of drainage and vent pipes shall be supported
by adjustable expansion pipe hangers having bolted hinged loops and turnbuckles, or approved
equal. Hangers on drainage and vent pipe shall be spaced not more than ten feet on center. Hanger
and collars shall be of size proportionate to the weight of the pipe supported.
C. Fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where secured
to concrete or brickwork walls, they shall be fastened with brass expansion bolts. Expansion bolts
shall be 1/4 inch brass bolts with twenty threads to the inch and of sufficient length to extend at least
three inches into solid concrete or brickwork, fitted with loose tubing or sleeves or proper length
to bring expansion sleeves in the solid concrete or brick wall. Where secured to tile walls or
partitions, they shall be fastened with 1/4 inch brass toggle or, through bolts. Where through bolts
are used, they shall be provided with plates or washers at back, set so that heads, nuts, and washers
will be concealed by plaster. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal, and exposed bolts, nuts, and screw
heads shall be provided with chromium -plated brass washers.
D. Copper pipe hangers shall be similar to Grinnell No. 260 with plastic coating for non -insulated
water piping and Grinnell No. 300 for insulated water piping. Drainage and vent pipe hangers shall
be similar to Grinnell No. 590.
E. All hot water supply and return piping shall be supported by approved steel hangers, spaced not
more than eight feet on centers, equipped with roller pipe supports equal to Fee and Mason, Figure
No. 272.
3.5 VALVE DESIGNATIONS
A. All valves shall be provided with stamped brass disc with use of valve clearly marked with index
number designating valve and use. Provide neat typewritten index directory, framed and under
glass, and mounted in mechanical room. The index is numbered consecutively through plumbing,
heating and air conditioning, in that order, with each valve on project provided with separate
number.
END OF SECTION
PIPING 15060 - 4
n
C
SECTION 15250
INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. This contact includes furnishing and installing all specified insulation.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 15010 - General.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION
A. All insulation required under the plumbing and heating and air conditioning contracts shall be
installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. Acceptable manufacturers shall be equal
to the following:
1. Johns -Manville.
2. Certain -Teed Saint Gobain Manufacturing Co.
B. Insulation:
1. Exhaust ducts:
a. Shall be insulated with interior duct liner in place of exterior insulation. Duct
liner shall be Certain -Teed 1.5 lb, two inch thick duct liner, or approved equal,
3 lb. per cubic foot density with vinyl spray one side.
b. All transverse joints shall be protected against air erosion by properly sealing all
edges and securing with sheet metal clips.
C. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips eighteen inches
on center.
2. Cold Water Piping Within Building Lines:
a. Shall be insulated with one inch thick Certain -Teed Snap -on Glass Fiber pipe
insulation, or approved equal, with a factory -applied vapor barrier jacket.
3. Pipe Fittings:
a. Insulate pipe fittings with Manville Zestons according to manufacturer's
recommendation.
11 1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
INSULATION
15250 - 1
i
4. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return:
a. Shall be insulated with one inch thick Certain -Teed Snap -on Glass Fiber pipe
insulation, or approved equal, with a factory applied canvas jacket. Canvas jacket
may be omitted underground. Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated same
as cold water, but all joints in insulation shall be sealed with a waterproof sealant.
C. Where insulation is shown to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required.
D. Where insulation is placed inside ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to
accommodate a total thickness of two inches. _
2.2 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD
A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a Class A flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke _
developed rating no greater than 50.
B. The flame spread rating of the canvas jacket shall not be in excess of 25. —
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION —
INSULATION 15250 - 2 _
7
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART1
GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A.
This contract will include the furnishings and installation of all labor and material necessary to
complete all plumbing and gas fittings as shown on the drawings and as specified as follows:
1. Gas supply system.
2. Water supply and service.
3. Furnishing and installation of all fixtures as shown on the drawings and as specified..
4. System of sanitary drainage, venting and connection to all fixtures as shown on the
drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals.
B.
Section 15010 - General.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 FIXTURES
A.
Furnish and install all fixtures and products in accordance the drawings.
B.
The contractor shall be responsible for the quantity of all fixtures, drains, valves, etc., as required
to make a complete installation.
C.
Lavatory and sink hot and cold water supplies shall be provided with chromium plated wall stops
and chromium plated supplies.
D.
All plumbing fixtures, floor drains, etc., shall be equipped with tamperproof screws.
E.
All floor mounted water closets and floor mounted service sinks shall be set in a full plaster of paris
bed and anchored to floor using brass anchoring bolts and brass screw caps. Once plaster has set,
install a continuous bead of silicone sealant. Color to be white.
F.
Install a continuous bead of silicone sealant around wall mounted lavatories and urinals. Color to
be white.
1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplimtion prohibited.
PLUMBING
15400 - 1
G. Provide Wade carriers for all fixtures that are mounted on stud walls. Carriers shall be securely
anchored to floor, wall framing, and roof structure. Carriers shall be as follows:
1.
Water Coolers
Wade No. W400-AM11
2.
Service Sinks
Wade - W-610
3.
Urinals
Wade - W-400-AM11
4.
Lavatories
Wade - W-520-09
2.2 TRAPS
A. Provide and install each fixture or equipment requiring a drain connection with a trap.
B. Traps installed on hub -and -spigot pipe shall be extra -heavy cast-iron. Traps installed on threaded
pipe shall be recess drainage pattern.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe.
B. Cleanout plugs larger than four inches will not be required.
C. Cleanouts and access covers at finished walls and exterior walls shall be Wade 8570-R N.B. cover
and at finished floors shall be Wade 8550-5 with Wade 8300-S #2, N.B. cover.
D. Omit access covers for cleanouts in non -finished locations.
E. All wall covers shall be cadmium plated and all floor cleanouts shall be polished nickel bronze flush
with finish floor.
F. Cleanouts exterior to the building shall be Wade 7100-X with 9" x 9" access cover set flush with
finish grade in 16" x 160 concrete pad.
2.4 ACCESS DOORS
A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings a Model Z-1376, Zurn stainless steel access door.
B. Sized as required to allow the concealed control plus four inches of clearance all around. Doors are
not to be less than 12 x 12 inches.
C. Doors shall be provided with hexed locks, all keyed alike.
2.5 VALVE BOXES
A. The contractor shall furnish and install butterfly valves m cast-iron valve boxes. Boxes, covers and
concrete shall be by the contractor.
B. The contractor shall furnish and install gate valves in concrete valve boxes.
PLUMBING 15400 - 2
7 PART 3 EXECUTION
F
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Utilities:
1. The contractor shall furnish, install, and pay for connections to water, gas and sewer
piping, in accordance with requirements of applicable local service companies.
B. The contractor shall provide necessary materials and labor to connect to the plumbing system all
fixtures and equipment shown on the drawings which have plumbing connections and which are
furnished and installed by others or are specified in other sections of these: specifications.
C. Cross Connection and Interconnections:
1. No plumbing futures, device, or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross
connection or interconnection between a distributing supply for drinking or domestic
purposes and polluted supply such as a drainage system of a soil or waste into the water
supply system.
D. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation and fixtures and equipment shall
be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical injury. At the
completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.
E. The contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all work and
shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing fittings, traps, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions.
1. Where pipes extend through concrete members, the contractor shall core all members and
slabs, unless sleeves have been provided.
2. Chipping concrete will not be allowed.
3. The contractor shall discuss all required corings with the architect before coring begins.
3.2 STERILIZATION
A. The entire hot and cold water piping system shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing
not less than fifty parts per million (ppm) of available chlorine or sodium hypochlorite solution.
1. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of 24 hours,
during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times.
2. A residual of four ppm shall be produced in all parts of the system at the end of the 24
hour period.
3. After sterilizing, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the
residual of chlorine content is not greater than .02 ppm unless otherwise noted.
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING 15400 - 3
7
SECTION 15804
VENTILATING
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work covered by this section includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for
the installation of a complete ventilating system and related work.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals.
B.
Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings.
C.
Section 15010 - General.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
EXHAUST SYSTEM
A.
Furnish and install a new exhaust system grilles as shown on the drawings. New grilles are to be
connected to the existing exhaust system.
B.
Provide new exhaust ducts, properly attached to the existing exhaust.system.
C.
Replace damaged or broken existing exhaust fans with matching new exhaust fans. Finished
installation of renovated system shall equal a new system installation.
D.
All units shall be equipped with a backdraft damper and all exhaust ducts shall extend to the outside,
properly flashed and waterproofed.
E.
All ceiling mounted exhaust fans shall be of the following manufactures:
1. Loren Cook.
2. Penn.
3. KG.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
Coordination
A.
Contractor shall coordinate the installation of new exhaust grilles, ducts, etc. with other trades.
0 1995 Gran Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
VENTILATING
15804 - 1
B. Coordinate demolition and renovation work so as to not contaminate other areas of the building not
included in the scope of work under this contract.
3.2 Operational Test
A. The finished installation shall be complete, allowing full operation of the ventilation system.
B. Demonstrate full operational system prior to final acceptance by architect.
3.3 Cleaning —
A. Remove all temporary protective films, wrappings, or covers from exposed ventilating system
components.
B. Remove all dirt and stains from exposed finished surfaces. Replace component if stain or dirt can
not be removed satisfactorily.
C. Repaint the painted finish when surfaces become chipped, scratched, or otherwise permanently
scarred. New paint shall match the color of similar new components.
3.4 Damage
A. Replace damaged components with matching new components.
B. Bent, scratched, or stained components shall be replaced with new components.
END OF SECTION —
VENTILATING 15804 - 2
SECTION 15840
DUCTWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. The work covered by this section includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for
the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as specified.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings.
C. Section 15010 - General.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the
inside with neatly finished airtight joints.
B. The ducts shall be installed completely free of vibration.
C. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of the duct,
except that factory -fabricated air turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made or where
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
D. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with factory fabricated deflectrols, or approved equal, and
all major branches where noted on the plans shall have spitters with an accessible operating handle
and locking device, Young Model 917 right angel gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator.
E. Sheet metal for ductwork shall be of galvanized iron and/or stainless steel or aluminum.
F. All duct systems shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA Low Pressure
Duct Systems.
G. Replacement ducts shall match the existing duct being replaced in all renovation work.
° 19" Green Harvey Anociues, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
6
DUCTWORK
15840 - 1
roll
2.2 DAMPERS
A.
All dampers, other than volume control dampers, fire dampers, and smoke dampers, as specified
elsewhere, shall be opposed blade gear -linked type with linkage out of the air stream, 4" x 1" x .125 —
aluminum channel frame, four inches wide extruded aluminum blades.
B.
DuPont Hystel gears and shafts, and Neoprene stripping along each blade edge, all as manufactured
by Ruskin, Prefco, or approved equal. Type CD45 with maximum of 10 CFM leakage per square
foot of damper when tested at four inches water gauge.
C.
Each damper shall be of the size shown on the drawings and shall be equipped with extended shaft
for motor operator or for locking quadrant.
D.
Galvanized frames and/or dampers will not be acceptable. —
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION —
A.
Contractor shall coordinate the installation of new ductwork with other trades.
B.
Coordinate demolition and renovation work so as to not contaminate other areas of the building not
included in the scope of work under this contract.
3.2 DAMAGE
A.
Replace damaged components with matching new components in order to insure full proper _
operation.
B.
Do not allow collapsed duct or other restriction to limit air flow.
3.3 BALANCING
A.
Renovated ductwork and associated air -distribution components will not require an air balancing test
or report.
B.
Contractor shall attempt to maintain current air flow CFM in all renovated work.
END OF SECTION
DUCTWORK 15840 - 2
SECTION 15870
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS
PART1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work covered by this section includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for
the installation of a complete air diffusing system, as shown on the drawings and as specified. All
side wall grilles, supply and return, shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals.
B.
Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings.
C.
Section 15010 - General.
D.
Section 15804 - Ventilating
E.
Section 15840 - Ductwork
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING EXHAUST GRILLES
A.
Ceiling exhaust grilles shall be as shown on the drawings.
B
All ceiling exhaust grilles shall be equipped with opposed blade volume controls which can be
operated from the face of the grille by a removable key and removable cores.
2.2
Ceiling Registers and Diffusers
A.
Ceiling registers and diffusers shall be as shown on the drawings.
B.
Acceptable manufacturer is Metalaire, series 7000, sized to accommodate existing ducts and ceiling
grid.
C.
Registers and diffusers shall have a 2424 finished frame, duct collar sized as required.
1995 Green Harvey Auaciams. Inc.
umuthoriva auplicaNue prohbimd. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870 - 1
2.3 FINISHES
A. The following items are to be baked off white enamel:
1. Ceiling supply diffusers.
2. Ceiling return air grilles.
3. Ceiling exhaust grilles.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Coordination
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of new registers and diffusers with other trades.
B. Coordinate demolition and renovation work so as to not contaminate other areas of the building not
included in the scope of work under this contract.
3.2 Cleaning
A. Remove all temporary protective films, wrappings, or covers from exposed ventilating system
components.
B. Remove all dirt and stains from exposed finished surfaces. Replace component if stain or dirt can
not be removed satisfactorily. —
C. Repaint the painted finish when surfaces become shipped, scratched, or otherwise Permanently
scarred. New paint shall match the color of similar new components.
3.4 Damage
A. Replace damaged components with matching new components.
B. Bent, scratched, or stained components shall be replaced with new components.
END OF SECTION
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870 - 2 _
SECTION 16010
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
PM
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related
work as shown on the drawings and/or specified as follows:
1. Conduits, pull wires, junction boxes for owner -furnished equipment.
2. Installation of fire alarm system.
3. Conduits, wiring, and installation of sound system.
4. Conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets for telephone system.
5. Installation of underground secondary services as shown on the drawings.
6. From starting point, connect all panelboards, meters, power outlets, convenience outlets,
switches and controls.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment, and appliances required to complete the installation
of the complete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawing.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01040 - Coordination and Meetings.
B. Section 01300 - Submittals.
C. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
1.5 REGULATIONS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the
applicable provisions of the. National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code
(NESC), and the terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful
jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules,
regulations, and authorities shall be trade by the contractor without additional charge to the owner.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment or devices shall conform
to the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The UL label or listing is required.
0 1995 Green Harvey Associa=, Inc.
r unauthorized duplication prohibited. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 1
F
C. Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the
following organizations shall apply:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
5. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Material List: As soon as possible after contract ward and before material is ordered, the contractor
shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's
name and general description.
B. Shop Drawings: Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical series, control diagrams, electrical
characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation, and pertinent data required for
installation. Submit shop drawings for at least the following applicable items:
1.
Fire alarm.
2.
Battery units.
3.
Primary cable.
4.
Alarm systems.
5.
Switchboards.
6.
Panelboards.
7.
Lighting fixtures.
8.
Transformers.
1.7 COOPERATION
A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the general contractor and all other contractors to coordinate
their work in order to avoid interference and delays and to arrange all parts of the work in order
to coordinate in service and appearance with all other parts.
1.8 CONTINUATION OF OPERATIONS
A. The contractor shall realize that facility must remain in operation throughout the construction
period.
B. Any interruptions in utilities shall be coordinated with the architect a minimum of 48 business hours
in advance and, if required, shall occur outside the normal operating hours of the building.
C. At all times, special care shall be taken to assure neat appearances in those areas being used during
the business hours. All excess materials, tools, equipment, and debris shall be removed and the
area left clean at the end of each day.
1.9 DEMOLITION
A. Each contractor for each respective trade shall remove from the project site, items shown on the
plans to be removed.
B. All items to be salvaged for the owner shall be stacked as directed by the architect. If items are
not to be salvaged, they become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. '-
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 2 _
F
C. The contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing facilities than is absolutely
necessary. All concrete, masonry, or other rigid material to be removed shall be cored or sawn
providing the smallest possible hole to allow the installation of pipes or conduits indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on
information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical
requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the contractor shall make all
adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required
to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The complete
responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this
specification under which the equipment is furnished.
B. To the extent possible, renovation work and components shall match existing components and allow
equipment full operation as originally designed.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by
a reputable manufacture may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets
the approval of the architect.
C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.
D. Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the
project site.
E. Material and equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements
specified below. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhere and as shown on
the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of
such products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fabrication, erection, and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class
workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an
orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The electrical contractor shall
check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed, or
related and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work
signifies the contractor's acceptance of existing conditions.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS
16010 - 3
7
3.2 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
A. Furnish and install all temporary electrical facilities required for construction and safety operations.
No part of the permanent electrical systems or the existing electrical system may be used for
temporary service unless approved by the architect.
B. Any interruptions in utilities shall be coordinated with the architect a minimum of 48 business hours
in advance and, if required, shall occur outside the normal operating hours of the building.
3.3 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and circuits for proper operating conditions and freedom from
grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and devices
shall be operated under load conditions.
B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the engineer may direct,
conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and
equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess the original
characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications.
C. Prior to acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record
voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings, make final adjustments of tap
changers on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with specifications and
equipment installed.
D. Perform other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove
acceptability.
E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The exchange will. furnish the necessary electric
power.
3.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the owner, furnish competent instruction to the engineer
in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems.
B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver two sets of complete operating and
maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment installed to the architect. Include catalog
data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists, and
manufacturer's operating and maintenance data.
C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals specified for
individual systems or equipment.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device
to identify each time with its respective service. Marking may be stencilled on the enclosure or
adjacent surface in utility area. Provide nameplates in finished area.
B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted.
In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape
is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 4
r
C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with
{ descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent
protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets.
3.6 WORKMANSHIP
A. All work shall be execute din a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical
appearance upon completion. All workers shall be capable experienced electricians.
B. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall be
set plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wiring troughs and barriers shall be as
required by the National Electric Code as amended to date.
C. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are
symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or rooms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side
of doors.
D. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the owner before
installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final
rough -in is made.
E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follow:
1. Thermostats - 4"-6"
2. Power Outlets - 1'-4" or as noted
3. Switches - 4'
4. Convenience Outlets - 1'-4" or as noted
Dimensions are from bottom of box to floor.
F. All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on
the drawings. ' All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls
do not extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs.
G. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. Outlet
boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly.
H. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required.
I. In all cases, provide outlet boxes with proper supports for fixtures.
J. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition.
K. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist of one
through circuit, to which shall be spliced the branch from this circuit.
L. Wire and cable connectors shall be solderless, mechanical type. Connectors for conductors #8
AWG and smaller shall be of the following manufacturers:
1. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. - Scotchlock.
2. Ideal Industries - Super -Nut spring connector with molded vinyl cap.
3. Buchanan Electrical Products - copper squeeze on type with molded rubber or vinyl cap.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 5
F
M. Conduits shall be of such size and shall be installed so that the required conductors may be drawn
in without injury or excessive strain. Only powdered soapstone may be used as a lubricant where
necessary. Sizes of conduits shall be in accordance with National Code tables. Flexible metal
conduit may be used for final connections to motors, etc., but shall not be over 48" in total length r
from outlet box to motor. Waterproof flexible conduit may be used in exterior locations.
Connectors for conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with
clamp -on molded covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical
Manufacturing Co., or Burndy Engineering Company. Flexible conduit smaller than 1/2" diameter
shall not be permitted to be used.
N. Where conduits enter boxes, they shall be secured in place by galvanized loclmuts and bushings.
Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction.
O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting
ceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight fitting rubber washers
drawn through before wires are pulled in-.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 6 _
l
SECTION 16110
r,
RACEWAYS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions.
C. Section 16450 - Grounding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated
or an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit. (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc -coated on the outside
and either zinc -coated or an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or .
an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside.
D. Flexible conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire
installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. No flexible conduit shall be installed over two
feet in length.
E. Liquid -Tight Flexible conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded liquid -tight PVC outer
jacket and continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where
a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in the
convolutions may be omitted.
F. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2 inch except where specifically approved for equipment
connections. Sizes shall be as noted on the drawings and where noted, sizes shall be as required
by the NEC.
1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. RACEWAYS 16110 - 1
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed.
B. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with
insulate throats, and shall be of one of the following types.
1. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and
clamped by one or more screws.
2. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions.
3. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit.
C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon equal plastic
compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only with
insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without O-ring seal. Each
connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the
outlet box, conduit, or other equipment to which it is connected.
D. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or IMC
permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw
connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and
connectors either steel or malleable iron only, concrete -tight or rain -tight, and either the gland and
ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. The connectors are to have
insulated throats. EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not
permitted.
E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity
of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid aluminum conduit larger
than 1/2 inch size.
F. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction
on opposite sides -of a building expansion join and each long run of exposed conduit that may be
subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall
be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring.
G. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits
and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water
vapor shall be of the continuous drain type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum
conduit is not permitted.
B. EMT: Not permitted underground or embedded in concrete.
C. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only
to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at
all resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp
locations and for connection to wet -pipe mechanical systems. All flexible conduit in kitchen, food
preparation, walk-ins, and dishwashing locations shall be liquid -tight.,
RACEWAYS 16110 - 2
r
r
D. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit may be embedded in
concrete providing the outside diameter does not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab,
wall, or beam; is located entirely within the center third of the member; and lateral spacing of
conduits is not less than three diameters.
E. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit, that is not completely encased in concrete but is in
contact with ground or on a vapor barrier, shall be wrapped in Scotchap 51 half -lapped, or shall
have an additional outside factory coating of polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of
20 mils. Other PVC of Phenolic resin -epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and
chemically resistant may be used, providing approval by the architect is obtained prior to
installation.
F. Exposed conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the
building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed
conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows.
G. Concealed Conduits: Unless otherwise noted, install conduit systems concealed where possible.
Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically
approved by the architect. Install concealed conduit systems in as directed lines as possible.
H. Exterior Underground Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit, wrapped as above, shall be used
for all circuits outside the building slab. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of two foot six inches
below finished grade. Concrete -encased PVC conduit may be used for all conductors except the
service entrance secondary.
I. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run, the number of quarter bends or equivalent between
terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four bends for conduits up to 1-1/4 inch, three
bends for 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch conduits, and two bends for 3 to 4 inch conduits. Conduits run
between cabinets or boxes shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs or 100 feet for tuns with
maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius. -
J. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the bottoms of boxes
or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors.
K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, when conduits pass from warm to cold
locations, and where otherwise indicated.
L. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not
used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves
that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yarn.
3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National
Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only
lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall
be permitted from metal roof decks.
B. Straps: Install one -hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe
hangers for conduits larger than 1-1/2 inch. Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used
k in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps.
RACEWAYS 16110 - 3
b.
C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where tow or more horizontal conduits or EMT
run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger
member by a U-bolt, one -hole strap, or other specially designed and approved fastener. ^
D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners,
clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the support of any conduit,
EMT or light fixtures in open ceiling areas. _
E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts,
to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts.
Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe
straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the architect.
F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers,
etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and
supporting members will not be acceptable.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Contractor shall furnish as -built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and
boxes run into floor and from underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations.
3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS
A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits
or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such
openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the architect.
END OF SECTION
RACEWAYS 16110 - 4
low
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions.
C. Section 16450 - Grounding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS)
A. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Use copper conductors
with 600 volt insulation and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors
shall not be permitted.
B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum, unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings.
Type THW minimum or Type XHHW filled cross -linked polyethylene. 90oC thermosetting
insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90°C minimum insulation within fixture wireways of
florescent fixtures, Type RF-2 or TFD commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for
Class 2 remote control and signal circuits.
C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum, unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings but not less than
NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits for 120 volts, or
more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control
and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No.14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control
and signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If contractor furnishes other than
specified equipment, it shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors as
required without additional cost to the owner.
f
° 1"5 Green Harvey Associates. Inc.
um dWiva duplication Prohibited. CONDUCTORS 16120 - 1
r
D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows:
120/208V
1. Phase A Black
2. Phase B Red
3. Phase C Blue
4. Neutral White
5. Ground Green _
Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor. Conductors No. 12 and 10
shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be
color coded at each termination and in each box or enclosure with six inches of half -lapped 314 inch
pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound.
2.2 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE
A. Foil shielded twisted pair cable shall be stranded equal to Belden Belfoil, sized as required.
B. Unless otherwise noted, co -axial cable shall be Belden RG-59, 20 AWG.
C. As required or specified in the section of these specifications specifying the equipment. Cable shall
be continuous from backboards or panels to outlets or other termination points without splices. ;
2.3 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the
cable shall be used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used for
cables with metallic sheath.
2.4 CONNECTORS AND LUGS
A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent
type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps.
B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt -type pressure
connectors, properly taped or insulated. _
2.5 TAPE
A. Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance, oil -
resistant vinyl backing, oil -resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per ASTM
D-568 Test Method B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS)
A. Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and
service ground.
B. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and ground.
CONDUCTORS 16120 - 2
r
4
f
C. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch
circuit loads.
D. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the architect, and shall be in accordance with the
applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments,
equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the architect. Written
reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the architect.
3.2 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from
termination to termination without splices unless approved by the architect.
END OF SECTION
CONDUCTORS
16120 - 3
SECTION 16130
BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 09900 - Painting.
C. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions.
D. Section 16450 - Grounding.
PART 2
PRODUCTS.
P
6
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
rA.
Construction: Zinc -coated or cadium-plated steel boxes of a class to satisfy the condition at each
outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts removed
only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Square comered, straight sided gang
boxes, four inch octagon concrete rings and four. inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars may be
+�
folded type; one-piece deep -drawn type for all other boxes.
B.
Size: To accommodate the required number and sized of conduits, wires and splices in accordance
with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes
`
not to exceed six inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of
boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the
i
device or application intended.
C.
Fixture Studs: 3/8 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and
r`
P
interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards.
D.
Exposed: Screw joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather.
E.
Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square comers and straight sides for receptacles and switches
mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone, or wood walls.
Install without plaster rings.
0 1995 Gran Harvey Associates, Inc.
}i Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
L
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16130 - 1
F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less
than four inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep for signal devices, 4-11/16 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep
for two devices and multigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles
on unfinished walls may be screw joint type with covers to fit the devices.
G. Wall -Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless
otherwise noted on the drawings.
H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameter by 1-1/2 inches deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket
fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter
opening. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed
conduits.
Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment
ground conductor, for serving motors, lighting futures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall
be green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing.
2.2 PULL BOXES
A. Comply with minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. Pull boxes with internal
volume not more than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull
boxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers
shall be same thickness as box and shall have corrosion -resistant screws or bolt attachments.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown, on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush
mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or
ceiling line, or, if installation walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 1/4
inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified.
Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster covers. A multiple of box
extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with
suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, .adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood,
expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work.
B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean
the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile,
block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height
indicated.. Verify with architect.
C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the
centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors
or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on the
architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the architect.
BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130 - 2
M
3.2 PULL BOXES
A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of
conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings.
3.3 FLOOR BOXES
A. Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor tile.
3.4 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum
1/2 inch flexible metallic conduit, four to six feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit
shall not be used as the ground.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means
of painted -on stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations.
In general, use yellow color.
END OF SECTION
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16130 - 3
i
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions.
C. Section 16450 - Grounding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use
type for mounting in a single -gang spacing, fully rated twenty amperes mirdmum on inductive and
resistive loads at 1201277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap switches and further
requirements specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single -pole, three-way or four-way, of the
maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any
position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or melamine
with cover of molded phenolic, urea, or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall
not be used for body or cover. Use ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Silver or Silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of
withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication WD1-1965, and shall be as follows unless
otherwise noted:
20A 120/277 ACI-eviton
1. 1P 1221-I
2. 2P 1222-I
3. 3-WAY 1223-I
4. 4-WAY 1224-I
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. General: Configuration and .requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in
accordance with NEMA Publication WD1, 1965, Part 3 and Part 10. Fire-resistant, non -absorptive,
hot -welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and bases with metal plaster ears (integral with
the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on the drawings. Ivory color unless
otherwise noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong.
B. Grounding Type: All receptacles shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment
ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table 250-
95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be
internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke.
° 1995 Green Harvey Associates. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1
C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be: 20A - 125V AC 2P 3W, Leviton 5362-SC-I
D. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box
with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The
cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be of `
the spring hinged flap type.
E. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be the same NEMA configuration as 20A 125 volt receptacle
except that the grounding pole shall be isolated from the mounting strap and be colored orange
similar to Hubbell #IG5251 or 1G4262. Ground these devices by means of a separate green
equipment grounding conductor.
F. Special: Receptacles for special applications shall be as indicated on the drawings. For kitchen
equipment furnished under another section of the specifications, complete with cord set. The
contractor shall verify exact requirements and furnish a matching receptacle where indicated. —
G. Hand Dryers: Contractor shall furnish and install electric hand dryers where shown on the
drawings. Dryers shall be World Model A-3, 1500 watts, 120 volts, single phase, 60 cycle,
mounted as shown on the drawings. Color shall be platinum.
2.3 PLUG CAPS
A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No
plug caps are required for duplex receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations
or where exposed to weather.
2.4 DEVICE PLATES
A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special
purpose outlet. Provide multi -gang outlet plates for multi -gang boxes. Plates on finished walls shall
be stainless steel. Screws shall be metal with counter -sunk heads in a color to match the finish of
the plate.
B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush
with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at
locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor -tight type. Provide hinged lift
covers for devices.
C. Communication: Plates for telephones and intercommunication have a 1/2 inch bushed opening in
the center.
D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEVICE PLATES
A. Install with alignment tolerance of 1116 inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces.
END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2
SECTION 16170
SWITCHES AND FUSES
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions.
C. Section 16450 - Grounding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES
A. 30 to 1200 Amperes
250 Volts AC, DC; 600 Volts AC
2, 3 Poles
Fusible and Non -Fusible
Copper Terminals
Enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 General Purpose
2. NEMA 3R Raintight
B. Where indicated, furnish and install heavy duty type safety switches with the electrical
characteristics, ratings and modifications shown on the drawings. Safety switches shall be
manufactured by Westinghouse.
C. All switches shall have:
1. Switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base.
2. Reinforced fuse clip.
3. Nonteasible, positive, quick make -quick break mechanisms.
4. NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise noted.
5. Metal nameplates, front cover mounted, that contain a permanent record on switch type,
catalog number and Hp ratings (with both standard and time delay fuses).
6. Handle whose position is easily recognizable and is padlockable in. the "off" position.
7. Visible blades.
° 1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
SWITCHES AND FUSES
16170 - 1
2.2 FUSES
A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss Fusetron or equal.
B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Feeder protection in conduction
with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125 % of load current or as required for
coordination. Current limiting high -interrupting capacity fuses coordinated with molded case circuit
breakers shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer.
C. Coordination: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide basic selective
protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective equipment.
D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DISCONNECTION MEANS
A. Install in each location indicated on the drawings.
3.2 SPARE FUSES
A. Furnish one complete set of each size of current limiting use other than Fusetron, each size of
current limiting fuse installed for circuit breaker protection, and each size Fusetron fuse in excess
of 30 amperes. Also one spare set of each size high voltage fuses installed.
END OF SECTION
SWITCHES AND FUSES 16170 - 2
r
B
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions.
C. Section 16110 - Raceways.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials, equipment, and devices related to the grounding system are specified under other sections
of these specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install an equipment grounding system. The equipment and neutral conductor shall be grounded in
accordance with the minimum code requirements and as indicated on the drawings or specifications.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code
requirements and as indicated on the drawings or specifications. The equipment ground (green
conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground of noncurrent-carring metal parts of the wiring
system or apparatus connected to the system. The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to
provide greater safety by limiting the electrical potential between noncurrent -carving parts of the
system and to provide a low impedance path to ground of possible ground fault currents.
B. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure of the main service equipment in the unisulated
equipment ground bus (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 25% of the largest service
overcurrent device.
C. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere in this section
of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding system and the service
grounding electrode conductor.
0 1 M Green Harvey Associate. Inc.
Unauthorized duplication prohibited. GROUNDING 16450 - 1
t
D. Devices: Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor from a grounding
terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles and
through flexible conduit to all light future housings.
E. Ground Bar: Provide an unisulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar,
in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches,
cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors.
The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboards, or a separately
mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. The ground
bar shall be adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly cleaning both surfaces to
assure good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations.
Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the
termination of equipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure
connectors for all three phase spares and spaces.
F. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the equipment
ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the conduit and flexible conduit
to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor. Install the grounding conductor
in the common conduit or raceway with the related circuit conductors.
G. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor
for each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit. Provide a separate green insulated
equipment grounding conductor for each single phase branch circuit. Install the required grounding
conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and/or neutral -conductors and
connect to the box or cabinet grounding terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more
than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor.
H. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a metallic housing
of electrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings provide ground bushing connected with
a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing
ground wiring only shall be bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install
grounding conductor in each non-metallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound
or low -voltage signals, and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor.
Bond the conductor at both ends in the equipment grounding system.
3.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized
in accordance with NEC 250-94, including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors
shall be continuous without joint or splice, and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded
to the conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and most direct path, and
terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment grounding
conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase
conductor, but not less than type TW. The equipment grounding conductor or straps shall be sized
in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder service serves a series of panelboards or transformers,
the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without splices. Grounding conductors shall
not be installed through metal -sheathed holes. All connections shall be available for inspection and
maintenance.
GROUNDING 16450 - 2
3.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps. If surface is coated, the coating
must be removed down to the bare metal. After the coating has been removed, apply a non-
corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is
removed from metal, it shall be painted or touched up with Galvanox.
3.5 TESTS
A. Test the completed grounding system with an ohm meter at the service ground bar and submit a
written report to the architect for approval. The service shall not be energized if the test shows
more than five ohms, unless approved by the architect.
END OF SECTION
GROUNDING 16450 - 3
i
r
t
r
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this
Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions.
C. Section 16450 - Grounding.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions, photometric data, and
descriptive literature for approval. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior approval
has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the specified and
proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the fixture schedule are indicative of the general type
desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer. Fixtures of similar
designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality
will be acceptable if approved by Underwriters' Laboratories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout of the type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps,
sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers, plasterings, etc., as required.
B. Fixture replacement is to be recessed type coordinated with new ceiling system.
C. Type 'A' fixture shall be equal to Williams 5224-RWIfA125, 2x4 troffer, four lamps -
F32TB/SP30, lens of 0.125 acrylic, and Valmont ballast E232SR120. Some fixtures to have an
emergency lighting feature as specified, see paragraph 2.10, A of this section.
D. Type 'B' fixture is equal to type 'A' in a 2x2 troffer series, two lamps.
1995 Green Harvey Associates, Inc.
r' Unauthorized duplication prohibited.
1
LIGHTING
16500 - 1
2.2 LAMPS
A. Lamps are as follows:
1. H.I.D.: Clear unless noted, Type T self -extinguishing. Universal burning lamps will not
be accepted.
2. Fluorescent: 40 W F40/T12 Cool White unless noted.
3. Incandescent: Inside frosted; extended service, 130 volt.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Phillips.
2. Sylvania.
3. General Electric.
2.3 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETL certified CBM label, suitable for 120V
operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Provide premium Class P —
protected ballasts with built-in thermally actuated automatic reclosing device. Manufactures shall
certify in writing that the ballast hot spot shall not exceed an ambient temperature of 90°F. Ballast
shall be energy saving type. Provide two bolt attachment of ballast.
B. H.I.D.: One lamp type as required for the application. Suitable for use with H.I.D. lamps. Ballast
for exterior H.I.D. lamps shall be rated for -20°F.
C. Manufacturers:
1. General Electric MaxiMiser I.
2. Advance Mark III. —
2.4 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. All futures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all
sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted
in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas.
2.5 FINISH
A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to apply finish. Metal parts shall be _
aluminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder coat, post -fabrication baked white enamel
finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS
A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy
insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contracts. —
2.7 CEILING TRIM
A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed.
Verify prior to ordering.
LIGHTING 16500 - 2
a 2.8 LENS
A. When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 100% acrylic meeting American Society
for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM
D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels, and other luminous plastic members of
fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch thick prismatic Pattern 19 clear acrylic material.
Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per
minute for a 1/2 inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the
naked eye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D-
795-44T (500 hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent
lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used.
The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax.
2.9 HOUSING
A. Unless otherwise specifically approved, use not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel
'finish applied over corrosion -resistant primer.
2.10 EMERGENCY LIGHT BATTERY PACKS
A. Lighting fixtures shall be provided with emergency lighting feature. Provide one emergency
lighting fixture per room and two per each corridor included with the scope of this contract.
B. Components shall consist of a sealed nickel -cadmium battery and a solid state invertor, chargers and
switch system. The components shall be self-contained within the fixture and be factory installed.
The rechargeable battery shall operate one lamp at an emergency level for a minimum of 90
minutes. The fixture shall be UL listed. System shall have a five year unconditional guarantee.
Units on switched circuits shall be wired such that the'fixture can be switched off without causing
the emergency battery to operate. Units shall be Bodine B-50 or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUPPORTS
A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry
units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between
structural members. No lighting fixtures, conduits or outlet boxes shall be supported from the
building sheet metal deck. Where lay -in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type.
Coordinate supports for lay -in fixtures with ceiling contractor.
3.2 LOW DENSITY CEILING
A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on
combustible low -density cellulose fiberboard (NEC 410-76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that
are not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shill be developed which
meets the approval of the engineer.
3.3 CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT
A. The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed fixture shall be coordinated with the type of
r ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation.
LIGHTING 16500 - 3
i
c
f
3.4 BLOCKING
A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to
prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect
alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be
installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads
to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and
removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure.
3.5 LAMP GUARDS —
A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent futures to prevent lamps from falling.
3.6 CLEANING
A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in
perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely lamped, clean and free from dust, --
plaster or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or
other components necessary to complete the fixtures.
B Remove all temporary protective films, wrappings, or covers from exposed ventilating system
components.
C. Remove all dirt and stains from exposed finished surfaces. Replace component if stain or dirt can
not be removed satisfactorily.
3.7 Damage
A. Replace damaged components with matching new components.
B. Bent, scratched, or stained components shall be replaced with new components.
3.8 LAMPS
A. Install new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven .days before building acceptance or beneficial
occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the engineer.
END OF SECTION
LIGHTING . 16500 - 4
r:
4 -
ESPECIAL CONDITIONS
F
I
7
TO:
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the day of
` 199_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for:
as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that
your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City
Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 199 at the bid price contained therein, subject to the
execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and
required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of
Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice.
The five percent (S%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract
documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such
contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Owner's Representative
F